US20040174847A1 - Wireless access unit using standardized management and connection protocols - Google Patents
Wireless access unit using standardized management and connection protocols Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20040174847A1 US20040174847A1 US10/803,386 US80338604A US2004174847A1 US 20040174847 A1 US20040174847 A1 US 20040174847A1 US 80338604 A US80338604 A US 80338604A US 2004174847 A1 US2004174847 A1 US 2004174847A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- base station
- wireless access
- communication unit
- access communication
- over
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 702
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 20
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 132
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 claims description 124
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 claims description 81
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims description 57
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 claims description 18
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 claims description 11
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 claims description 10
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 97
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 51
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 45
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 19
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 17
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000000524 functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000009432 framing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000000881 depressing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000030279 gene silencing Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002250 progressing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- MHKLKWCYGIBEQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-(1,3-benzothiazol-2-ylsulfanyl)morpholine Chemical compound C1COCCN1SC1=NC2=CC=CC=C2S1 MHKLKWCYGIBEQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KQPKMEYBZUPZGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[(4-azido-2-nitroanilino)methyl]-5-(hydroxymethyl)-2-methylpyridin-3-ol Chemical compound CC1=NC=C(CO)C(CNC=2C(=CC(=CC=2)N=[N+]=[N-])[N+]([O-])=O)=C1O KQPKMEYBZUPZGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100022103 Histone-lysine N-methyltransferase 2A Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100022102 Histone-lysine N-methyltransferase 2B Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101001045846 Homo sapiens Histone-lysine N-methyltransferase 2A Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001045848 Homo sapiens Histone-lysine N-methyltransferase 2B Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001111984 Homo sapiens N-acylneuraminate-9-phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100023906 N-acylneuraminate-9-phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 206010000210 abortion Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002457 bidirectional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010267 cellular communication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013144 data compression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008571 general function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036541 health Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000014759 maintenance of location Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000011218 segmentation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007493 shaping process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009131 signaling function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003892 spreading Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007723 transport mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- G06Q10/00—Administration; Management
- G06Q10/08—Logistics, e.g. warehousing, loading or distribution; Inventory or stock management
- G06Q10/087—Inventory or stock management, e.g. order filling, procurement or balancing against orders
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- G06Q30/00—Commerce
- G06Q30/06—Buying, selling or leasing transactions
- G06Q30/0601—Electronic shopping [e-shopping]
- G06Q30/0633—Lists, e.g. purchase orders, compilation or processing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/10—Connection setup
- H04W76/12—Setup of transport tunnels
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W40/00—Communication routing or communication path finding
- H04W40/02—Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W74/00—Wireless channel access
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W8/00—Network data management
- H04W8/02—Processing of mobility data, e.g. registration information at HLR [Home Location Register] or VLR [Visitor Location Register]; Transfer of mobility data, e.g. between HLR, VLR or external networks
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W84/00—Network topologies
- H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
- H04W84/10—Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
- H04W84/14—WLL [Wireless Local Loop]; RLL [Radio Local Loop]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
- H04W88/02—Terminal devices
- H04W88/04—Terminal devices adapted for relaying to or from another terminal or user
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
- H04W88/02—Terminal devices
- H04W88/06—Terminal devices adapted for operation in multiple networks or having at least two operational modes, e.g. multi-mode terminals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W92/00—Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
- H04W92/04—Interfaces between hierarchically different network devices
Definitions
- the field of the present invention relates to a method and system for providing communication services.
- PBXs private branch exchanges
- key type systems have for many years been available to business offices and other establishments as an alternative or adjunct to public telephone service.
- a PBX or key system allows users connected to the system to place intra-system telephone calls without accessing the public telephone service.
- Such a system can provide significant economic benefits particularly if intra-system telephone traffic is heavy.
- call routing over the selected lines may be automatic.
- the user may select an intra-system call or a call over the public telephone network according to the first digit dialed, and the PBX or key system then analyzes the first digit and routes the call to the proper destination using the appropriate vehicle.
- PBX and key systems are useful for providing economical coverage within a private local telephone system
- the PBX users or key system users may still be required to rely on a local exchange carrier (LEC) whose landlines are connected to the PBX.
- LEC local exchange carrier
- the local exchange carrier then routes the call to along distance carrier. Because the user must pay both the local exchange carrier and long distance carrier for each long distance telephone call, long distance telephone service can be quite costly, particularly if the volume of long distance calls is large.
- PBX or key telephone systems Besides high costs for long distance service, another potential disadvantage of existing PBX or key telephone systems is that deployment can be difficult or expensive in remote areas. For example, if long distance service or other public network services are required, then deployment of a PBX or key system is generally limited to where landlines have been laid, so that the PBX or key system can have a connection to a local exchange carrier which connects to the long distance provider. If no landlines are present in the desired deployment location, then it can be expensive to connect landlines to provide long distance access for the PBX or key system. Also, conventional PBX or key systems are generally not very mobile where they require an interface with landlines for long distance access or other types of public network services.
- the invention provides in one aspect a communication system having a wireless trunk for connecting multiple phone lines over wireless communication links to a cellular network.
- a central telephone switch or customer premises equipment (CPE) such as a private branch exchange or key system, is connected through one or more trunks to a wireless access communication unit.
- the wireless access communication unit provides the CPE with one or more wireless communication channels to a cellular network. Calls may be selectively routed by the CPE over landlines to a network or, instead, to the wireless access communication unit, thereby bypassing landlines.
- Multiple wireless access communication units in a geographical region can communicate with a single base station of the cellular network, so long as the base station capacity and current traffic load permit.
- a wireless access communication unit which has multiple trunk interfaces for connection to a CPE, and a radio transceiver for establishing one or more wireless communication links to a cellular network.
- Each trunk interface is connected to a line card comprising a vocoder and a subscriber interface.
- a controller interfaces the line cards with the radio transceiver, and assists in the conversion of data from a format suitable for wireless transmission to a format suitable for transmission over the CPE trunk, and vice versa.
- Data communicated between the wireless access communication unit and the network may be encrypted at the wireless access communication unit and decrypted at the mobile switching center or else at a separate transcoding unit interposed between the mobile switching center and the base station subsystem.
- the wireless access communication unit operates according to a protocol utilizing aspects of frequency division multiple access (FDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA) and/or code division multiple access (CDMA), whereby communication channels are assigned to the wireless communication unit on a demand basis.
- FDMA frequency division multiple access
- TDMA time division multiple access
- CDMA code division multiple access
- communication between the wireless access communication unit and a base station of the cellular network is carried out over a plurality of wireless duplex communication channels, one channel for each CPE trunk, with base transmissions in time slots on one frequency band and user transmissions (including those from the wireless access communication unit) in time slots on a different frequency band.
- the user time slots may be offset in time from the base time slots, and radio transmissions may be carried out using spread spectrum techniques.
- the wireless access communication unit registers each CPE trunk to which it is connected such that each CPE trunk appears as a subscriber to the network.
- Each CPE trunk may therefore be addressed by a unique subscriber identifier.
- the wireless access communication unit preferably utilizes aspects of GSM signaling to communicate information to the network, such that communication with a GSM-based network is carried out transparently by the wireless access communication unit.
- the wireless access communication unit periodically re-registers each of its CPE trunks.
- the base station receives and monitors the re-registration signals from the wireless access communication unit and, if the re-registration signals are absent for a predefined period of time, issues an alarm message to the network.
- the wireless access communication unit may be provided with a unique equipment identifier so that the base station can correlate the different wireless links to a single wireless access communication unit.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram of an overall system architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a basic architecture for a wireless access communication unit in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 3 is a diagram of a software architecture for the wireless access communication unit of FIG. 2.
- FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a basic architecture for a base station.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram of a software structure for the base station of FIG. 4.
- FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating addressing of multiple trunks connected to a wireless access communication unit according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an interface signaling structure between a base station and a base station controller.
- FIG. 8 is an abstract diagram of a system protocol architecture.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a division of bearer path functions among a wireless access communication unit (CPRU), base station and base station controller components of a preferred communication system.
- CPRU wireless access communication unit
- FIG. 10 is a diagram showing interfaces between the different components of a preferred system.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram of multiple wireless access communication units in different location areas connected to a single base station controller.
- FIG. 12 is a call flow diagram for a network-level registration procedure.
- FIG. 13 is a call flow diagram for a network-level de-registration procedure.
- FIG. 14 is a call flow diagram for dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a communication system having a PBX.
- FIG. 15 is a call flow diagram for dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a communication system including a key system (KTS).
- KTS key system
- FIG. 16 is a call flow diagram for dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a communication system having another type of PBX.
- FIG. 17 is a call flow diagram for dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a communication system having another type of KTS.
- FIG. 18 is a call flow diagram for a successful outgoing call setup without PSTN interworking.
- FIG. 19 is a call flow diagram for a successful outgoing call setup with PSTN interworking.
- FIG. 20 is a call flow diagram for a scenario involving call waiting.
- FIG. 21 is a call flow diagram for a scenario involving three-way calling.
- FIG. 22 is a call flow diagram for DTMF tone transmission.
- FIGS. 23 and 24 are frequency distribution diagrams illustrating frequency spectrum allocations according to two exemplary embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 25 is a timing diagram of an over-the-air protocol that may be used in the communication system shown in FIG. 1.
- FIG. 26 is a timing diagram of an alternative over-the-air protocol for the communication system shown in FIG. 1.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an authentication process.
- FIG. 28 is a call flow diagram illustrating network-level registration.
- FIG. 29 is a call flow diagram illustrating alarm reporting.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall system architecture of a communication system 101 in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
- a plurality of telephone stations 102 are connected to a central telephone switch 105 .
- telephone stations 102 could comprise telephones, modems, fax machines, or other devices that are capable of communicating over a completed call connection.
- the central telephone switch 105 will be referred to herein as a “customer premises equipment” or “CPE.”
- the CPE 105 may comprise, for example, a private-branch exchange (PBX) system or a key system.
- PBX private-branch exchange
- key system The design of various types of PBX and key systems is well known in the art.
- the CPE 105 is connected to both a public switched telephone network (PSTN) 125 and a wireless access communication unit 106 (also referred to occasionally herein, or in the drawings, as a “customer premises radio unit” or “CPRU”).
- PSTN public switched telephone network
- CPRU customer premises radio unit
- calls are selectively placed over the PSTN 125 and the wireless access communication unit 106 according to the type of call.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 communicates over a wireless trunk 108 (which comprises a plurality of wireless communication links) to a base station 109 .
- the base station 109 is connected, along with other base stations 109 in adjacent or nearby geographical regions, to a base station controller 112 .
- the base station controller 112 is connected to a transcoding unit 115 , which is connected to a mobile switching center (MSC) 116 .
- MSC mobile switching center
- the base station controller 112 may be connected directly to the mobile switching center 116 , without the intermediary transcoding unit 115 .
- the mobile switching center 116 is connected to the PSTN 125 .
- the base station controller 112 is also connected to an operations and maintenance center (OMC) 120 , which is in turn connected to an operations support system (OSS) 122 .
- OMC operations and maintenance center
- OSS operations support system
- the mobile switching center 116 is connected to a home location register and authentication center (HLR/AuC) 123 and to the operations support system 122 , as shown in FIG. 1.
- the base station 109 may also be connected to a local management terminal 121 .
- the invention provides in one aspect signaling techniques and protocols for facilitating communication in a system having a wireless trunk.
- Signaling information is transported across one or more of the various interfaces of the communication system 101 , so as to allow communication between the CPE 105 and the PSTN 125 to take place utilizing the capabilities of the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the communication system incorporates aspects of the IS-661 communication protocol (or a modified version of the IS-661 protocol) and the GSM communication protocol, thereby employing a “hybrid” protocol. Further details relating to preferred signaling techniques and protocols are described later herein, after a description of some of the basic components of a preferred system including the operation thereof.
- calls may be placed from telephone stations 102 directly over the PSTN 125 (i.e., over a landline connection), or over the wireless trunk 108 to the PSTN 125 by utilizing the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- a call When a call is to be initiated at one of the telephone stations 102 , it may be routed either directly to the PSTN 125 or to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the routing of the call may be either based on manual selection, or accomplished automatically based on the number dialed, as further described herein.
- local telephone calls are routed directly to the PSTN 125 , while long distance telephone calls are routed through the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the CPE 105 may comprise, for example, a PBX or a key-type system.
- the PBX is preferably capable of routing an outgoing call placed from a telephone station 102 to the PSTN 125 or to the wireless access communication unit 106 based on either an access digit or the telephone number dialed by the user.
- the user may, for example, dial a certain first digit (e.g., an ‘8’) for access to the wireless access communication unit 106 , and a different first digit (e.g., a ‘9’) for direct LEC access to the PSTN 125 .
- a certain first digit e.g., an ‘8’
- a different first digit e.g., a ‘9’
- the user could, for example, access the wireless access communication unit 106 to make outgoing long distance telephone calls, or the PSTN 125 for other types of outgoing calls.
- some types of PBXs can be configured to analyze the dialed number, and to route long distance and local calls. Utilizing this ability, the PBX can be configured to route long distance calls through the wireless access communication unit 106 and local or emergency calls through the PSTN 125 .
- the user may manually select a line (either for the wireless access communication unit 106 or the PSTN 125 ) by depressing a key on the telephone deskset.
- the user could, for example, select the call processing unit 106 for outgoing long distance calls, and the PSTN 125 for other types of outgoing calls.
- Some key systems can, like certain PBXs, be configured to analyze the dialed number, and to route a call either to the wireless access communication unit 106 or the PSTN 125 depending on the initial digits of the call and/or the number of digits dialed. In this manner, the key system can, for example, be configured to route long distance calls through the wireless access communication unit 106 , and local or emergency calls through the PSTN 125 .
- the system may be configured with less flexibility but a potentially simpler architecture.
- the system can be configured such that all incoming calls are routed directly from the PSTN 125 to the CPE 105 , and that all outgoing local calls (whether voice or data), all outgoing long distance data calls, and all TTY calls for persons with disabilities are also routed directly through the PSTN 125 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 would generally provide outgoing long distance voice communication capabilities.
- the CPE 105 is connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 across a CPE trunk interface 104 .
- the CPE trunk interface 104 comprises a plurality of CPE trunks, each of which may comprise, for example, loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks.
- the design of both loop-start trunks and ground-start trunks is well known in the art.
- both loop-start trunks and ground-start trunks can be supported by the same local area switching equipment (i.e., the same PBX or KTS).
- the PBX preferably has certain operating characteristics.
- the PBX In addition to supporting loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks (or both) on the CPE trunk interface 104 between the PBX and the wireless access communication unit 106 , the PBX also preferably supports DTMF address signaling on the loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks.
- the PBX may be configured to route calls through either the PSTN 125 or the wireless access communication unit 106 , as described previously, and therefore has the ability to identify which trunks lead to the PSTN 125 and which trunks lead to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the PBX preferably has the ability to specify the order in which the trunk groups are tried when an outgoing call is placed, and to re-route outgoing long-distance calls through the PSTN 125 instead of the wireless access communication unit 106 in case of access problems from the wireless access communication unit 106 to the wireless system.
- the KTS preferably has certain operational characteristics.
- the KTS also preferably 11 supports DTMF address signaling on the loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks, and has the ability to route calls through either the PSTN 125 or the wireless access communication unit 106 , as described above.
- the KTS may also be provided with supplementary call support features and a route selection feature (i.e., the ability to identify trunk groups leading to the wireless access communication unit 106 and the PSTN 125 , and to specify on the KTS the order in which the trunk groups should be tried). If a route selection feature is provided, the KTS should have the ability to re-route outgoing long-distance calls through the PSTN 125 instead of the wireless access communication unit 106 , in case there are access problems from the wireless access communication unit 106 to the wireless system.
- a route selection feature i.e., the ability to identify trunk groups leading to the wireless access communication unit 106 and the PSTN 125 , and to specify on the KTS the order in which the trunk groups should be tried. If a route selection feature is provided, the KTS should have the ability to re-route outgoing long-distance calls through the PSTN 125 instead of the wireless access communication unit 106 , in case there are access problems from the wireless access communication unit 106 to the wireless system.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 acts as the gateway for wireless trunk access to the CPE 105 via the wireless system, and correlates the individual CPE trunks with wireless communication links such that calls from the CPE 105 can be completed over a wireless network.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an embodiment of a wireless access communication unit 605 connected to a CPE 105 (see FIG. 1) across a plurality of CPE trunks 602 (in this example, four CPE trunks 602 ).
- the wireless access communication unit 605 also is connected over a plurality of wireless communication links (or “pipes”) 609 to a wireless network and, in particular, to a base station (not shown in FIG. 6).
- the wireless access communication unit 605 establishes the wireless communication links 609 and correlates therewith the CPE trunks 602 , so that communication for a particular CPE trunk 602 is carried out over an assigned wireless communication link 609 .
- Users connected to the CPE 105 can obtain access to the wireless access communication unit 605 (and, hence, to the wireless network) by being connected through the CPE 105 to one of CPE trunks 602 .
- a potentially large number of users connected to the CPE 105 can have the ability to complete calls to the wireless network, with the number of users able to make calls simultaneously equaling the number of CPE trunks 602 (and wireless communication links 609 ) available.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 acts as the gateway for the CPE 105 to the wireless network, and preferably performs a variety of functions.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 performs off-hook detection for outgoing calls and supports provision of a dial tone to the CPE 105 (and thereby to the telephone station 102 initiating the call).
- the wireless access communication unit 106 also initiates acquisition of a wireless communication channel (such as an over-the-air time slot, for example, if the wireless network is a TDMA and/or TDD system), and initiates call control procedures.
- a wireless communication channel such as an over-the-air time slot, for example, if the wireless network is a TDMA and/or TDD system
- the wireless access communication unit 106 detects dialed address digits (i.e., DTMF tones) and passes the received digits via call control signaling to the network. The wireless access communication unit 106 decides whether to launch a normal or emergency call depending upon an end-of-dialing indication received from the base station 109 indicating the type of call (based on digit analysis performed at the base station 109 ). In addition, the wireless access communication unit 106 detects off-hook transitions from the CPE 105 , and initiates call release procedures towards the network in response to an off-hook transition. When a call is completed, the wireless access communication unit 106 provides landline-transparent control of disconnect procedures for clearing initiated by the CPE 105 . As part of this function, the wireless access communication unit 106 implements the release guard times supported by conventional wireline systems.
- dialed address digits i.e., DTMF tones
- the wireless access communication unit 106 decides whether to launch a normal or emergency call depending upon an end-of-dialing indication
- the wireless access communication unit 106 also supports the signaling of DTMF digits during an active call. As part of this function, the wireless access communication unit 106 detects DTMF tones from the CPE 105 during an active call and relays the digits to the network via DTAP signaling. Also during a call, the wireless access communication unit 106 may pass call progress tones received from the network transparently over the bearer path to the CPE 105 . Whenever call progress DTAP signaling is received from the network, the wireless access communication unit 106 converts the call progress DTAP signals into call progress tones towards the CPE 105 . The wireless access communication unit 106 may generate reorder tones to the CPE 105 when needed, so as to indicate congestion of the wireless network or permanent signal timer expiry conditions to the CPE 105 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 also preferably performs a number of functions related to bearer processing.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 performs vocoding for voice communication.
- vocoding includes encoding/compression of speech towards the network and decoding/de-compression of speech in the reverse direction (i.e., towards the CPE 105 ).
- the wireless access communication unit 106 also preferably performs forward error correction (FEC), encryption and decryption for the bearer voice (with the wireless access communication unit 106 and transcoding unit 115 being peer-to-peer endpoints for ciphering), and echo cancellation functions.
- FEC forward error correction
- the wireless access communication unit 106 encrypts the bearer data prior to transmission over the air (i.e., over the wireless trunk 108 ), and decrypts bearer data received from the network. Echo cancellation functions are supported by the wireless access communication unit 106 so as to suppress the echo potentially generated towards the wireless network if, for example, a 2-4 wire hybrid structure is present at the interface with the CPE 105 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 in conjunction with the wireless system supports management and security features such as call registration, de-registration, user authentication, ciphering of bearer information, and network management functions.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may also support outgoing emergency (i.e., “911”) calls and end-to-end DTMF signaling during active calls.
- the wireless access communication unit 201 comprises a plurality of subscriber ports 203 , which are provided for connecting the CPE 105 (see FIG. 1) to the wireless access communication unit 201 across a trunk interface (e.g., trunk interface 104 shown in FIG. 1).
- Each subscriber port 203 can support one call connection over the wireless access communication unit 201 , and may comprise, for example, an RJ-11 interface. While four subscriber ports 203 are shown in FIG.
- the number of subscriber ports 203 may vary depending upon the particular application or environment in which the wireless access communication unit 201 is deployed.
- the wireless access communication unit 201 may be configured with only a single subscriber port 203 , or may have any number of subscriber ports 203 limited only by practical considerations such as the number of wireless communication channels generally accessible and available to the wireless communication unit 201 .
- the subscriber ports 203 may comprise any suitable interface, with an RJ-11 interface being but one example of such an interface.
- Each subscriber port 203 is connected to an individual line interface unit or line card section 205 .
- the wireless access communication unit 201 comprises four line card sections 205 , one for each subscriber port 203 .
- the line card section 205 provides a physical subscriber line interface from the CPE 105 to the wireless access communication unit 201 , and in addition provides digitizing and data compression functions.
- the line card section 205 comprises a subscriber interface 207 which is connected to one of the subscriber ports 203 .
- the subscriber interface 207 comprises a subscriber line interface circuit (SLIC) 217 , which provides conventional loop interface functions including battery feed, overload protection. supervision, and 2-4 wire hybrid. Both loop-start and ground-start signaling are preferably supported by the line card section 205 . The selection between loop-start and ground-start signaling may be made, for example, by use of a manual toggle switch or dip switch (not shown) located on the wireless access communication unit 201 , each line card section 205 may be individually configured to interface with a loop-start or ground-start trunk.
- SLIC subscriber line interface circuit
- the subscriber interface 207 further comprises a standard CODEC or, alternatively, a subscriber line audio processing circuit (SLAC) 215 which carries out analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion between the line card section 205 and the user station (e.g., telephone station 102 shown in FIG. 1) connected to the subscriber port 203 .
- the CODEC or SLAC 215 provides a standard ⁇ -law pulse code modulation (PCM) interface.
- PCM ⁇ -law pulse code modulation
- the subscriber interface 207 also comprises a ring generator 216 for generating a ringback tone.
- a digitized data stream is output from the CODEC or SLAC 215 and provided across signal line(s) 214 to a vocoder 206 , which compresses the digitized data stream into a compressed data signal.
- the vocoder 206 comprises a relatively high-speed digital signal processor 211 (operating at, e.g., a rate of twenty million instructions per second or other suitable rate), along with support modules such as a high-speed static random-access memory (SRAM) 212 and an EPROM 213 .
- SRAM static random-access memory
- the vocoder 206 preferably provides, as part of its decoding function, an interpolation capability for deriving predicted speech patterns, so as to handle situations where, for example, the wireless access communication unit 201 detects data frames that contain errors, or else the data frames contain errors that cannot be corrected by forward error correction (FEC).
- the decoding function of the vocoder 206 also preferably provides a mute capability for silencing the output to the CPE 105 when beneficial to do so, such as during control traffic exchanges.
- the vocoder 206 outputs a compressed data signal at a rate of, e.g., 8 Kbps, which is sent to a control line card assembly (LCA) 226 located in a control section 220 . Control section 220 thereby receives four compressed data signals, one from each of the line card sections 205 .
- LCA control line card assembly
- Each line card section 205 also hosts a subscriber interface module (SIM) 208 .
- SIM subscriber interface module
- the general functions of the SIM 208 are to provide system security and store subscriber-specific information, including such things as subscriber authentication information and subscriber-specific data.
- the SIM function is duplicated for each CPE trunk supported by the wireless access communication unit 201 , as each CPE trunk may be viewed as a different subscriber by the network. This duplication may be explained with reference to FIG. 6.
- a plurality of CPE trunks 602 are shown connected to the wireless access communication unit 605 (each CPE trunk 602 being connected to a subscriber port 203 shown in the more detailed diagram of FIG. 2).
- a separate SIM 606 is associated with each of the CPE trunks 602 .
- the wireless access communication unit 605 comprises four SIMs 606 .
- the wireless access communication unit 605 further comprises a plurality of radio interface units 607 , one for each of CPE trunk 602 , for the purpose of passing data and other information to the wireless transceiver (not shown) which handles the physical wireless communication links 609 .
- each subscriber within the communication system requires unique identification and possibly different system parameters.
- each CPE trunk is associated with a unique identifier and, preferably, unique authentication and other system parameters, which are implemented at least in part with the separate SIM 208 used in each line card 205 .
- the SIM 208 are used in the wireless access communication unit 201 .
- the functionality of the SIM 208 may be implemented as one or more non-removable SIM chips within the wireless access communication unit hardware architecture.
- the SIM 208 stores within a non-volatile memory (such as a ROM, or non-volatile RAM) subscriber information such as a subscriber identifier.
- the subscriber identifier comprises an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) number.
- IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
- the SIM 208 also runs an authentication procedure such as, for example, an “A3” and/or “A8” authentication procedure conventionally used in certain GSM applications. Further details regarding authentication may be found in copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/988,505, previously incorporated herein by reference.
- the control section 220 of the wireless access communication unit 201 provides timing and control for virtually all aspects of the wireless access communication unit 201 .
- the control section 220 comprises a processor 225 which may comprise, for example, a 16-bit RISC processor (such as a C165 or C163 processor manufactured by Siemens Corp.) and associated support modules (i.e., SRAM 223 , flash memory 224 , etc.). Access to the SIM 208 is initiated by the host processor 225 and controlled and formatted by the control line card assembly (LCA) in the control section 220 .
- the processor 225 also coordinates most system activities and moves data between the various modules.
- the processor 225 is connected to the control LCA 226 which, as noted above, is connected to the vocoder 206 from each of the line card sections 205 .
- the control LCA 226 is also connected to a radio interface line card assembly (RIF LCA) 227 .
- the control LCA 226 provides the interface between the radio section and the line card section of the wireless access communication unit 201 .
- the control LCA 226 packages and formats data, and coordinates and controls the over-the-air (OTA) protocol. It thereby maintains coordination between up to four compressed serial data streams (one from each of the line card sections 205 ) and their respective over-the-air communication channels.
- OTA over-the-air
- the radio interface LCA 227 is connected to a baseband processor 228 , which may include a digital radio ASIC (DRA) 229 .
- the baseband processor 228 is connected to a radio section 240 .
- the radio section 240 preferably comprises a plurality of antennas 243 which are selectable by a selector 242 which is connected to the control LCA 226 . Signals from one or more antennas 243 are thereby provided to a radio transceiver 241 (possibly including multiple radio receivers, one for each antenna 243 ).
- antenna diversity techniques are utilized such that the wireless access communication unit 201 selects the best antenna (and/or radio receiver) for each frame of time in which it communicates.
- Various antenna selection techniques are known in the art, or are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,085,076 which is hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein.
- the wireless access communication unit 201 may be powered either through an external DC power supply 250 or an on-board battery 251 .
- the battery 251 may be used as a reserve power supply, being brought into service automatically if the external DC supply 250 is cutoff or otherwise unavailable.
- a power section 221 for the wireless access communication unit 201 may comprise local voltage regulators to supply required power to the logic and radio sections, and a switching regulator to supply any requisite loop battery voltage.
- the wireless access communication unit 201 may be provided with an LED 231 or other visual display mechanism(s) to indicate the status of the device to an observer.
- the types of status conditions to be displayed may include, for example, whether the power is on, whether the device is functional (i.e., all self tests have been passed), or whether the device is in service (i.e., is currently registered with a base station).
- compressed serial data is transferred to and from the multiple line cards 205 under the direction of the control LCA 226 .
- the control LCA 226 places the compressed serial data in a format suitable for the radio interface LCA 227 . It also performs any desired encryption or adds forward error correction information.
- the control LCA 226 transfers the data to the radio interface LCA 227 which passes the data to the baseband processor 228 .
- the radio interface LCA 227 keeps track of channel and timing information, and instructs the baseband processor 228 to process the data according to the channel and timing parameters.
- the baseband processor 228 comprises a transmitter for formulating continuous phase modulated spread-spectrum signals, or other types of quadrature or related signals, as described, for example, with respect to transmitters shown in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,629,956, 5,610,940 or 5,548,253, all of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference as if set forth fully herein.
- the baseband processor 228 sends the data to the radio section 240 which converts the signal to the appropriate transmission frequency and performs any necessary filtering for transmission over the air.
- the frequency band utilized by the wireless access communication unit 106 is generally dictated by the overall communication system within which the unit is deployed. For example, the frequency band may be within the PCS frequency band of 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz, or may be any other suitable frequency band or bands.
- Incoming message signals are received by one or more of antennas 243 and sent to the radio transceiver 241 for downconversion and/or filtering as needed.
- the downconverted and/or filtered data is then sent to the baseband processor 228 which demodulates the received signal.
- the wireless access communication unit 201 transmits and receives messages using a spread spectrum format.
- the baseband processor 228 preferably comprises a spread spectrum correlator.
- spread spectrum correlators are known in the art, examples of which include embodiments illustrated or described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,629,956. 5,610,940, 5,396,515 or 5,499,265, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein.
- the baseband processor 228 outputs, among other things, a received signal strength indicator (RSSI), which is used by the control LCA 226 in selecting the best antenna 243 (and/or radio receiver) for reception of the incoming signal.
- RSSI received signal strength indicator
- the baseband processor 228 provides a stream of data bits to the radio interface LCA 227 , which transfers the data to the appropriate line card 205 based upon the over-the-air communication channel over which the data was received.
- the data is then processed by the line card 205 and sent to the CPE 105 via the particular subscriber port 203 connected to the line card 205 .
- FIG. 3 A diagram of a preferred software structure for the wireless access communication unit 201 is shown in FIG. 3.
- the software of the wireless access communication unit 201 is functionally divided into two main components, based on the physical interfaces supported by the wireless access communication unit 201 . These two main components are referred to in FIG. 3 as the line manager 350 and the over-the-air manager 351 .
- the line manager 350 generally handles the CPE trunk management and communication between the wireless access communication unit 201 and the CPE 105 . In addition to CPE trunk management and communication interface functions, the line manager 350 is also responsible for call signaling, DTMF recognition, and transfer of collected DTMF digits to the over-the-air manager 351 .
- the line manager 350 comprises a plurality of line drivers 303 and a plurality of SIM drivers 304 , one line driver 303 and one SIM driver 304 for each CPE trunk supported by the wireless access communication unit 201 .
- a single line driver 303 and SIM driver 304 collectively comprise a CPE line software component 302 .
- the over-the-air manager 351 handles the communication interface and link management to the base station 109 (see FIG. 1).
- the over-the-air line manager 351 is also responsible for receiving DTMF digits from the CPE 105 (via the line manager 350 ) and relaying the DTMF digits to the base station 109 (which ultimately conveys them to the PSTN 125 ), as set forth in more detail U.S. Pat. No. 6,526,026, previously incorporated herein by reference.
- the over-the-air line manager 351 also implements the over-the-air communication protocol, including end-to-end communication with various network entities such as the base station controller 112 and mobile switching center 116 (shown in FIG. 1).
- over-the-air communication protocols that may be implemented by the over-the-air manager 351 include, for example, the GSM direct application transfer part (DTAP) protocol, or the IS-661 over-the-air (“O-Notes”) protocol as described in the OMNI_Notes_RMT Protocols Rev. 02.03D (release date Jun. 30, 1997), appearing as a Technical Appendix A filed herewith, and hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein.
- the over-the-air manager 351 of the wireless access communication unit 201 preferably implements the IS-661 protocol as set forth in the above-referenced OMNI_Notes_RMT Protocols publication, or a variation thereof.
- the over-the-air manager 351 comprises a plurality of CPE line link objects 310 , one for each CPE trunk (i.e., subscriber port 203 ) supported by the wireless access communication unit 201 .
- Each CPE line link object 310 provides the signaling resource for a single CPE line or trunk, and comprises several components which together form a signaling protocol stack.
- the components of the signaling protocol stack work together to interface with a CPE line to provide call management, mobility management and radio resource functionality required to complete a voice call, and the registration functionality required to utilize network resources.
- Each CPE line link object 310 comprises a CPE line manager 311 , the purpose of which is to interface with the CPE line software component 302 for the appropriate CPE line or trunk.
- the CPE line manager 311 interfaces with a GSM call management component 312 and a GSM call registration component 313 , both of which interface with a GSM mobility management component 314 .
- the GSM mobility management component 314 interfaces with a protocol adaptation (PAL) component 315 , which interfaces with an over-the-air state (OTA) machine 316 .
- PAL protocol adaptation
- OTA over-the-air state
- the OTA state machine 316 is generally responsible for managing the physical radio interface, and communicates with the radio transmit/receiver interface and slot management (RTRX) component 321 .
- the CPE line manager 311 signals the GSM mobility management component 314 to initiate connection establishment procedures, as described in more detail hereinafter with respect to the call flow diagrams appearing in FIGS. 13 through 22.
- the CPE line manager 311 also controls transmission of DTMF digits to the network, the enabling of the speech path, generation of ringback tones, generation of a-busy tone (in non-PSTN interworking situations), and passing of on-hook indication to the CPE 105 .
- the CPE line manager 311 manages CPE-initiated call clearing as well as normal and emergency call procedures.
- the GSM call management component 312 , GSM registration component 313 , and GSM mobility management component 314 provide a degree of GSM functionality relating to call management, registration, and mobility management, respectively.
- the protocol adaptation component 315 adapts, if necessary, the GSM signaling protocol to the over-the-air protocol (such as, for example, to the IS-661 over-the-air protocol).
- the OTA state machine 316 implements the over-the-air protocol and, as noted, manages the physical radio interface.
- the OTA manager 351 further comprises a hardware services component 320 which provides a programming interface to the hardware (including hardware controlled by the line drivers 303 and SIM drivers 304 ) of the wireless access communication unit 201 .
- the OTA manager 351 may comprise a real-time operating system (RTOS) 330 , which may be a multi-tasking operating system, as well as a power-on/reset initialization (POST) component 323 and a debug port manager 322 .
- RTOS real-time operating system
- POST power-on/reset initialization
- the debug port manager 322 if provided, allows access externally to the internal status of the software, and also permits software downloads.
- the OTA manager 351 also comprises an operations, administration and management (OAM) component 324 .
- the OAM component runs at the application level, and performs such functions as recognition of faults, creating and sending alarms, and communicating with the line manager 350 for call processing data needed in fault detection and alarms.
- the types of faults or failures monitored may include, for example, hardware failures (such as power supply failures, radio unit failures, line card failures, and so on), software failures, communication failures, and quality of service failures (e.g., unsuccessful call attempts per time period, time slot interchange requests per time period, unsuccessful time slot interchanges per time period. number of dropped calls per time period, channel quality as indicated by bit error rate, and so on), among others.
- Fault reporting may be coordinated such that a single fault that causes multiple failures due to the dependency of the software, hardware and telecom functions will result in a single fault being reported.
- the functionality of the over-the-air manager 351 used to support the wireless access communication unit 201 may be viewed as a subset or modification of the functionality that would be used to support a mobile user application.
- the mobility management interface (MMI) software component used in a conventional GSM system to support a mobile user is, in the software architecture shown in FIG. 3, replaced with a CPE line manager 311 .
- a logical instance of the signaling protocol stack is provided for each CPE line connected to the wireless access communication unit 201 (as opposed to having a single logical instance of the signaling protocol stack for a mobile user application), and the SIM driver is modified over a mobile user application to accommodate multiple SIMs (or their logical equivalents) by, for example, the provision of multiple independent SIM drivers 304 .
- an ability is added to associate a hardware voice path from the CPE 105 with a base station communication link.
- the signaling protocol may also be modified, as further described herein, to support digit analysis by the base station 109 (see FIG. 1). DSAT and DTA adaptor software components conventionally used in certain mobile user applications are not needed by the wireless access communication unit 201 , and are therefore not implemented.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 interfaces with a base station 109 of the wireless system, thereby allowing ultimate access to the PSTN 125 .
- a block diagram of a preferred base station 401 is shown in FIG. 4.
- the base station 401 comprises a number of separate components connected together by a common global bus backplane, as illustrated in FIG. 4. These components include a digital line card 404 , an over-the-air (OTA) processor card 405 , a power supply module 407 , and a plurality of radio cards 406 , all of which reside on an electronics module 420 .
- OTA over-the-air
- the electronics module 420 is connected to an I/O module 421 , which comprises protection circuitry 403 to prevent such things as damage from short circuits.
- Each radio card 406 is connected, via the protection circuitry 403 , to one of a plurality of antennas 403 .
- the digital line card 404 is connected, via protection circuitry 403 , to the PSTN 125 (through base station controller 112 and MSC 116 , as shown in FIG. 1) over a backhaul line 430 , and possibly to other base stations 109 as well over other physical connections.
- the base station 401 may be connected to a local AC power supply line 425 , if available.
- the wireless access communication unit (identified by reference numeral 412 in FIG. 4) transmits over-the-air messages to and receives over-the-air messages from the base station 401 .
- the multiple antennas 411 and radio cards 406 are used at the base station 401 for achieving antenna diversity. Typically one antenna 411 is selected at a given time for transmitting or receiving over-the-air signals.
- the OTA processor card 405 may comprise a spread spectrum correlator and other baseband processing circuitry for correlating a spread spectrum signal received from the wireless access communication unit 412 and converting it to data bits.
- the OTA processor card 405 transfers data to the digital line card 404 , which formats the data and sends it over a backhaul to the PSTN 125 via the other intervening system components (such as the base station controller 112 and MSC 116 ). Similarly, the digital line card 404 receives data from-the PSTN 125 , and transfers the data to the OTA processor card 405 which formats the data for the over-the-air protocol and transmits the formatted data using a selected radio card 406 and antenna 411 .
- the primary functions of the radio cards 406 are to transmit and receive RF data packs, to perform packet data integrity services (e.g., cyclic redundancy checks), and to support antenna diversity algorithms.
- the primary function of the OTS processor card 405 is to move bearer data between the radio cards 406 and the digital line card 404 .
- the OTA processor card 405 also executes operations, administration, management and provisioning (OAM&P) requests from the digital line card 404 , communicates signaling information (using internal base station messages or “I-Notes”) with the digital line card 404 , and communicates signaling information (using over-the-air signaling messages or “O-Notes”) with the wireless access communication unit 412 .
- OAM&P operations, administration, management and provisioning
- the primary functions of the digital line card 404 are to handle link access procedures for the “D-channel” (LAPD) transport on the backhaul line 430 , to exchange bearer data between the OTA processor card 405 and the network-side backhaul components (such as the base station controller 112 ), and to multiplex and demultiplex bearer data on the backhaul line 430 .
- LAPD “D-channel”
- the digital line card 404 include synchronizing the over-the-air bearer frame timing with the timing on the backhaul line 430 (such as a T1 line), to provide translation between the OAM&P procedures supported on the network and radio interfaces, to map internal base station messages (e.g., I-Notes) to/from the LAPD transport on the backhaul, and to communicate signaling information (using, e.g., signaling I-Notes) with the OTA processor card 405 .
- the backhaul line 430 such as a T1 line
- I-Notes internal base station messages
- signaling information using, e.g., signaling I-Notes
- FIG. 5 A preferred high level software architecture for the base station 401 is depicted in FIG. 5.
- the software of the base station 401 is split into two functional groups, one functional group relating to the over-the-air functions and the other functional group relating to the line card functions.
- These two main functional groups are shown in FIG. 5 as the OTA manager 502 and the line card manager 503 , each of which preferably runs on its own processor board. Communication between the OTA manager 502 and the line card manager 503 may be carried out using a dual-port RAM (not shown) physically residing on the digital line card 404 .
- Software for the OTA manager 502 and the line card manager 503 may be executed using different processors.
- the software for the OTA manager 502 is executed using a MC68430 microprocessor, while the software for the line card manager 503 is executed using a MC68MH360 microprocessor, both of which are manufactured by Motorola Corporation.
- the microprocessor for the OTA manager 502 is preferably the bus master and has access to the dual-port RAM via the global bus (i.e., the backplane). IS-661 signaling messages in the form of I-Notes and bearer data are transferred across the dual port RAM interface, thereby allowing signaling communication between the OTA manager 502 and the line card manager 503 .
- the primary high level functions of the OTA manager 502 are to move bearer data between the dual port RAM and the radio cards 406 , and to handle call control signaling between the line card manager 503 and the wireless access communication unit 412 .
- Other functions of the OTA manager 502 include radio resource management, terrestrial resource management, and OAM&P support.
- the primary high level functions of the line card manager 503 include mulitplexing and demultiplexing bearer data between the dual port RAM and the backhaul line 430 (according to a protocol such as CCITT I.460, for example, if a T1 backhaul line is used), execution of LAPD transport over the backhaul line 430 (using, for example, a Q.921 interface protocol), routing and translation of signaling messages between the OTA manager 502 and the backhaul LAPD, and OAM&P support.
- a protocol such as CCITT I.460, for example, if a T1 backhaul line is used
- execution of LAPD transport over the backhaul line 430 using, for example, a Q.921 interface protocol
- routing and translation of signaling messages between the OTA manager 502 and the backhaul LAPD and OAM&P support.
- FIG. 5 Various interfaces associated with the base station 401 are shown diagrammatically in FIG. 5 as dotted lines, and include an over-the-air interface or “O-interface” 560 between the wireless access communication unit 412 and the base station 401 , an internal interface or “I-interface” 561 between the OTA manager 502 and the line card manager 503 , and a network interface or “N-interface” 562 between the base station 401 and the network-side backhaul components (such as the base station controller 112 , MSC 116 , and PSTN 125 shown in FIG. 1). Further information regarding these interfaces may be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,021,333, previously incorporated herein by reference, or in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/988,482, previously incorporated herein by reference. These interfaces are also shown at an abstract level in FIG. 10, described later herein.
- the base station 401 manages the radio resources for the wireless access communication unit 412 , and thereby provides support for the network side of the wireless trunk 108 (see FIG. 1).
- a wide variety of different communication schemes and radio resource protocols may be used. If, for example, the base station 401 implements an IS-661 protocol for over-the-air communication, then the base station 401 manages the resources necessary to support the wireless communication channels between the wireless access communication unit 412 and the base station 401 , including time slots and spread spectrum codes.
- the base station 401 also provides multiplexing functions for the transfer of data to and from the backhaul line 430 providing the connection to the PSTN 125 .
- the base station 401 may, for example, multiplex data over a T1 (or fractional T1) backhaul line 430 to the base station controller 112 , which, as noted, pipes the data to and from the PSTN 125 via the MSC 116 .
- Protocol signaling over the N-Interface 562 which connects the base station 401 (or 109 in FIG. 1) to the base station controller 112 (see FIG. 1), may be transported using the Q.921 LAPD protocol.
- Protocol signaling over the O-Interface 560 which connects the base station 401 to the wireless access communication unit 412 , may be accomplished using over-the-air signaling messages (“O-Notes”) according to the IS-661 protocol.
- the O-Notes may be transmitted along with bearer data in IS-661 RF packets.
- Specific software functional components for each of the OTA manager 502 and the line card manager 503 are also depicted in FIG. 5.
- the OTA manager 502 comprises a signal processing component 513 and an OTA datalink component 514 which handle the transfer of bearer data for the OTA manager 502 .
- the signal processing component 513 and OTA datalink component 514 interact with an IS-661 protocol component 512 which implements the IS-661 (or other suitable) over-the-air protocol and contains the protocol state machines for execution of the protocol on the base station 401 .
- the signal processing component 513 and OTA datalink component 514 thereby deliver bearer data and signaling information in IS-661 packets 541 .
- the IS-661 protocol component 512 interfaces with an OAM&P component 510 and an I-interface router component 511 , and provides any necessary translation of signaling to the IS-661 protocol.
- the line card manager 503 comprises a signal processing component 523 and a bearer datalink component 524 which handle the transfer of bearer data for the line card manager 503 .
- the signal processing component 523 and the bearer datalink component 524 delivers and receives bearer data 552 (in, e.g., an I.460 format) over a Ti backhaul link 553 , which comprises one or more of the T1 time slots available on backhaul line 430 .
- the line card manager 503 also comprises a LAPD component 522 which delivers and receives signaling messages (e.g., N-Notes) over a LAPD signaling link 551 .
- the LAPD component 522 interfaces with an OAM&P component 520 and an I-interface router component 521 .
- the I-interface router component 521 of the line card manager 503 communicates with the I-interface router component 511 of the OTA manager 502 , thereby allowing transfer of I-Notes between the line card manager 503 and the OTA manager 502 .
- the base station 401 connects and manages radio and terrestrial bearer channels for call-related features, and supports system administration via OAM&P controlled by the system operator through the operations management center 120 (see FIG. 1). As part of its radio resource management functionality, the base station 401 supports outgoing voice calls (normal and emergency) from the wireless access communication unit 412 . Incoming pages to the wireless access communication unit 412 may optionally be supported by the base station 401 . Because the wireless access communication unit 412 can be embodied as a stationary unit, handoff features otherwise necessary to support mobile user applications do not need to be utilized by the base station 401 to support the wireless access communication unit.
- the base station 401 may be configured so as to support time slot interchange (TSI) whereby traffic in time slots experiencing unacceptable levels of interference are relocated to “quieter” time slots.
- TTI time slot interchange
- the base station 401 can employ frequency interchange or code interchange, respectively, if aspects of FDMA or CDMA techniques are utilized for the over-the-air protocol.
- the base station 401 manages mapping of the radio channels (including the wireless communication channels of the wireless trunk 108 ) to the terrestrial (i.e., backhaul) channels.
- the base station 401 also provides, through its OAM&P functionality, support for administrative state changes, configuration, and provisioning of the radio resources.
- the base station 401 also provides fault management and alarm management for the radio resources, and sends fault or alarm signals to the base station controller 112 .
- the base station 401 provides signaling flow control across the over-the-air interface, power control management for each radio channel. radio link recovery upon radio link interruption, and debug information logs to the base station controller 112 .
- the base station 401 may send performance metrics relating to the radio resources to the base station controller 112 for analysis.
- the base station 401 is generally capable of handling calls from more than one wireless access communication unit 412 , if multiple wireless access communication units 412 are deployed within the service area of the base station 401 .
- the number of wireless access communication units 412 depends upon the number of wireless channels available at the base station 401 and the amount of traffic at the time call requests are made to the base station 401 .
- the base station 401 may, if desired, be configured so as to logically associate multiple wireless channels assigned to a particular wireless access communication unit 412 , so as to facilitate such things as de-registration, as further described herein.
- the base station 401 manages and allocates the backhaul channels (such as TI time slots) over the backhaul line 430 .
- the base station 401 indicates backhaul channel allocation to the base station controller 112 through signaling messages.
- the base station 401 need not support handoffs, and therefore need not support re-routing of backhaul channels to accommodate handoffs.
- the OAM&P component 520 of the base station 401 provides support for administrative state changes, configuration, and provisioning of terrestrial resources. It also provides support for performance metrics of the terrestrial resources, and sends the metrics to the base station controller 112 .
- the OAM&P component 520 further provides fault management and alarm management for the terrestrial resources, which are also sent to the base station controller 112 .
- the base station 401 also provides slip management and recovery for T1 backhaul connections, bearer rate adaptation between the radio channels and the backhaul channels, and inband signaling within the bearer data frame to control the transcoder unit 115 .
- the base station 401 is involved in establishing, maintaining and tearing down outgoing voice calls received from the wireless access communication unit 412 .
- Preferred call flows pertaining to such functions are shown in, e.g., FIGS. 14 through 19, and described in more detail hereinafter.
- the base station 401 also relays DTMF signaling from the end user to the PSTN 125 , if necessary, during an active telephone call. This signaling is relayed transparently through the base station 401 , and is supported by the I-interface and N-interface transport procedures.
- the base station 401 also provides digit analysis for outgoing telephone calls.
- the base station 401 also preferably provides security support in various manners.
- the base station 401 may, for example, provide support for bearer ciphering that occurs at the transcoding unit 115 and the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the base station 401 may also support the GSM temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI) for protection of the user identity.
- TMSI GSM temporary mobile subscriber identity
- the base station 109 is connected to the base station controller 112 over an interface such as an N-interface (such as the N-interface 562 described previously with respect to FIG. 5).
- Data including signaling messages and bearer traffic) are passed between the base station 109 and the base station controller 112 across the N-interface.
- a preferred base station controller 112 may be viewed in one aspect as a base station subsystem controller that is used for managing one or more base stations 109 .
- a primary responsibility of the base station controller 112 is to provide an interface between the MSC 116 and the radio access subsystem (i.e., the system components responsible for establishing and maintaining the physical radio channels).
- the base station controller 112 incorporates aspects of the IS-661 communication protocol and the GSM communication protocol, thereby using what may be referred to as a “hybrid” protocol. Details of a preferred communication protocol may be found in, for example, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/988,482, previously incorporated herein by reference.
- the base station controller 112 may be implemented using the IS-661 protocol in its entirety, or the GSM communication protocol in its entirety.
- the base station controller 112 plays a greater role in radio resource management, and may be viewed as essentially comprising a compact switch in charge of radio interface management.
- the base station controller 112 is configured with intelligence to enable it to instruct the base station 109 and mobile stations (as well as the wireless access communication unit 106 ) when to allocate, handoff and release radio channels.
- the interface between the base station 109 and base station controller 112 in a GSM-type system is referred to as an A bis interface.
- the base station controller 112 preferably performs a variety of resource management functions. As part of these functions, the base station controller 112 switches bearer circuits and provision of bearer connectivity to form a path from the base stations 109 to the MSC 116 for outgoing voice calls from the wireless access communication unit 106 . In addition to switching bearer circuits, the base station controller 112 provides signaling paths from the wireless access communication unit 106 to the MSC 116 and other network elements. If required, the base station controller 112 carries out the interworking between the BSSMAP radio resource management procedures on the GSM A-interface and the “N-Notes” radio resource management procedures on the N-interface.
- the base station controller 112 is involved in the allocation and release of radio channels. If the IS-661 protocol is used, then the base station 109 is the entity that actually assigns and releases over-the-air resources. As part of call setup, however, the base station controller 112 is the entity that coordinates this process. The base station controller 112 also controls the allocation and release of backhaul channels. If the IS-661 protocol is used, then the base station 109 is the entity that actually assigns the bearer resources over the backhaul channels. However, as part of call setup, the base station controller 112 coordinates this process as well.
- the base station controller 112 is also involved in ciphering of transmitted data. While the Transcoding unit 115 (see FIG. 1) is preferably the network end-point for bearer ciphering, the base station controller 112 sets up and coordinates ciphering of bearer messages.
- Certain mobility management procedures such as authentication and identification, run end-to-end between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 , and are relayed through the base station controller 112 with essentially no interworking requirements.
- the base station controller 112 performs interworking between the N-interface and A-interface procedures.
- the base station controller 112 may perform interworking between the N-interface and A-interface procedures for location updating or network-level registration (both normal and periodic, as further described herein), de-registration or IMSI detach, time slot interchange reallocation, and mobility management connection establishment.
- Call control messages and procedures run end-to-end between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 , and are relayed transparently through the base station controller 112 .
- the base station controller 112 provides a signaling path between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 to carry out call control signaling.
- the base station controller 112 may support a variety of interfaces.
- the base station controller 112 preferably supports the T-interface to the transcoding unit 115 or, if the transcoding unit functionality is consolidated with the base station controller 112 , a GSM A-interface 571 between the consolidated base station controller/transcoding unit and the MSC 116 .
- the base station controller 112 also preferably supports the N-interface to the various base stations 109 to which it is connected.
- the base station controller 112 transmits and receives information to the transcoding unit 115 , shown in FIG. 1.
- the transcoding unit 115 in one aspect comprises a base station subsystem (BSS) entity located, in one embodiment, between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 .
- BSS base station subsystem
- the transcoding unit 115 is under management control of the base station controller 112 , but is physically located on the premises of the MSC 116 , thereby allowing the base station controller 112 to be remotely located from the site of the MSC 116 .
- the transcoding unit 115 comprises a number of transcoding unit shelves, operating independently of one another but under the control of the base station controller 112 . In a preferred embodiment, each transcoding unit shelf supports up to 92 bearer channels.
- the transcoding unit 115 generally provides the network side processing of key functions on the bearer path. This processing may include, for example, speech transcoding, network-side forward error correction (FEC), and network-side enciphering and deciphering of bearer voice.
- FEC forward error correction
- the transcoding unit 115 preferably provides bidirectional conversion between encoded voice data received from the user side, and “mu-law” coded pulse-code modulated (PCM) data received from the network side at 64 kilobits per second.
- the vocoder 206 in the wireless access communication unit 106 compresses speech received from the CPE 105 for over-the-air transmission towards the network. In the reverse direction, the vocoder 206 in the wireless access communication unit 106 de-compresses over-the-air speech prior to transmission to the CPE 105 .
- the transcoding unit 115 preferably comprises, among other things, a speech encoder and speech decoder.
- the speech encoder in the transcoding unit 115 receives PCM speech data from the network delivered at 64 kilobits per second, and compresses this data into a sub-rate over-the-air channel for transmission towards the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- Forward error correction (FEC) information is added separately at the transcoding unit 115 by the FEC function.
- the speech decoder in the transcoding unit 115 processes compressed speech data from the wireless access communication unit 106 , and transcodes this data to produce 64 kbit/s PCM speech data for transmission towards the MSC 116 .
- FEC Forward error correction
- the speech decoder in the transcoding unit 115 additionally provides an interpolate function to output predicted speech patterns, in the event that the base station 109 detects frames that contain errors that are not correctable by the forward error correction function.
- the speech decoder in the transcoding unit 115 also provides a mute capability for silencing the output to the A-interface when necessary, such as during control traffic transmissions.
- FEC forward error correction
- the base station controller 112 and/or transcoding unit 115 uses the FEC information to detect the presence of errors, and to estimate the most probable emitted bits given the received ones.
- the base station controller 112 and/or transcoding unit 115 applies forward error correction on the frames received from the vocoding function, before the frames are sent across the N-interface.
- the FEC decoding in the network-to-user direction is performed by the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- a bearer encryption (or ciphering) mechanism utilized in the system is preferably based on the GSM A5/1 algorithm, which is an algorithm well known in the art.
- the two endpoints in the system for encryption and decryption are the wireless access communication unit 106 and the transcoding unit 115 . Where communication is divided into time frames and time slots (such as in certain types of time division multiple access or TDMA systems), encryption and decryption may be performed on a per-frame basis.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 and the transcoding unit 115 preferably are “encryption synchronized” in the sense that the frame number used by the wireless access communication unit 106 to encrypt a frame is the same as the frame number used by the transcoding unit 115 to decrypt, and vice versa.
- the GSM A5/1 algorithm involves the generation of encryption/decryption masks on a per-frame basis, based on the frame number.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 and the transcoding unit 115 increment the frame number for each frame cycle on the over-the-air and backhaul interfaces.
- the same frame length e.g., 20 milliseconds
- incrementing the frame number each frame cycle normally maintains frame number synchronization between the two endpoints of the encryption/decryption function.
- the transcoding unit 115 may support a variety of interfaces.
- the transcoding unit 115 may support the A-interface linking the transcoding unit 115 at the MSC 116 , and the T15 interface linking the transcoding unit 115 to the base station controller 112 .
- the T-interface carries bearer voice data that is processed by the transcoding unit bearer functions and relayed on the A-interface to the MSC 116 , as well as A-interface signaling over SS7 links.
- the transcoding unit 115 provides transparent pass-through of signaling between the base station controller 112 and MSC 116 over SS7 links and, optionally, X.25 or similar type links.
- the T-interface also carries signaling for OAM&P control of the transcoding unit 115 , and inband signaling between the transcoding unit 115 and the base station controller 112 for dynamic per-call control of the transcoding unit functions.
- Signaling exchanged between the transcoding unit 115 and the base station controller 112 is concentrated in a specific time slot (e.g., the first time slot of a time frame), and controlled through the level-2 link-access procedures for the D-channel (LAPD) protocol.
- LAPD D-channel
- FIG. 9 is a high level diagram illustrating a preferred breakdown of bearer path functions performed at the wireless access communication unit 106 , the base station 109 , and the base station controller 112 and/or transcoding unit 115 .
- the wireless access communication unit bearer path functions 901 include voice encoding and decoding 911 , forward error correction (FEC) 912 , encryption and decryption 913 , and tone generation 914 .
- the base station bearer path functions 902 include backhaul framing and channel multiplexing and demultiplexing.
- the base station controller and transcoding unit bearer path functions 903 comprise voice encoding and decoding, forward error correction (FEC), encryption and decryption, backhaul framing, and channel multiplexing and demultiplexing. These functions have been mentioned previously in relation to the various components of the system, and are further described in various levels of detail elsewhere herein or in materials incorporated by reference herein.
- FEC forward error correction
- the speech encoding/decoding, encryption/decryption and FEC functions performed in the wireless access communication unit 106 are mirrored in the based station controller 112 and/or transcoding unit 115 .
- the channel multiplexing/de-multiplexing and backhaul framing functions performed in the base station 109 are also mirrored by the base station controller 112 and/or transcoding unit 115 .
- the transcoding unit 115 is connected to the mobile switching center (MSC) 116 , which is connected to the PSTN 125 .
- the MSC 116 is a cellular switch that acts as an interface between the base station subsystem (BSS) and the PSTN 125 , and acts as the gateway to the long-distance network.
- the MSC 116 has telephone exchange capabilities including call setup, routing selection, switching between incoming and outgoing channels, control of communications, and release of connections.
- the MSC 116 performs its functions while taking into account mobility management aspects of the subscriber, including authentication, ciphering, radio resource management, and location register updating procedures.
- the MSC 116 also allows the wireless access communication unit 106 interworking to the PSTN 125 .
- the MSC 116 may be part of a digital multiplex system (DMS) “super-node” based switching system, capable of providing the switching functions in a cellular network. Also, the visitor location register (VLR) is preferably co-located and integrated with the MSC 116 .
- DMS digital multiplex system
- VLR visitor location register
- the MSC 116 may support a variety of interfaces.
- the MSC 116 may support an A-interface providing linkage between the MSC 116 and the base station subsystem (BSS). particularly the base station controller 112 and the transcoding unit 115 , and a PSTN interface which is used for connecting the MSC 116 to the PSTN 125 across which voice and circuit traffic is transmitted.
- the MSC 116 also may support a mobile application part (MAP) interface, which is a CCS7 application permitting mobility information to be transferred among network level components.
- MAP mobile application part
- the MSC 116 may support a billing center interface, which is used for connecting the MSC 116 to a downstream processor for downloading of billing events; an operations management center (OMC) interface, which is used to administer the MSC 116 and visitor location register (VLR), and a service center interface, which is used for connecting the service center function responsible for relaying and store-and-forwarding short messages to mobile stations.
- OMC operations management center
- VLR visitor location register
- service center interface which is used for connecting the service center function responsible for relaying and store-and-forwarding short messages to mobile stations.
- the MSC 116 preferably authenticates subscribers and, if accessible to the system, mobile stations.
- the MSC 116 interfaces to the PSTN 125 , and may interface to, for instance, public land mobile networks (PLMNs) or PCS-1900 networks.
- PLMNs public land mobile networks
- the MSC 116 also provides terrestrial channel allocation, and call control and signaling support.
- the MSC 116 may perform echo cancellation towards the PSTN 125 , handling and management of database information, charge recording, handling of subscriber registration and location management, and operation measurements.
- the MSC 116 is connected to a home location register (HLR) and authentication center (AuC), collectively shown as an integrated unit HLR/AuC 123 in FIG. 1.
- the HLR/AuC 123 may be built on a digital (e.g., DMS) super-node platform, and interconnect with various functional entities including the visitor location register, MSC, and mobile application part (MAP).
- the HLR component of the HLR/AuC 123 contains information about subscribers, services assigned to the subscribers, the status of such services, and any further information required to support the operation of the services when active.
- the HLR responds to requests from the MSC 116 and/or VLR to provide or update subscriber data.
- the HLR communicates with the VLR to download subscriber data and to obtain call routine information for the mobile stations in the region covered by the VLR.
- the AuC component of the HLR/AuC 123 contains subscriber keys for use in authenticating attempts to access the network.
- the AuC component uses subscriber keys to generate authentication vectors, which are provided to the VLR via the HLR component. Further details regarding authentication, as noted, may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/988,505, previously incorporated herein by reference.
- the information held by the HLR component of the HLR/AuC 123 allows mobile stations to be addressed by means of a unique number, regardless of geographic location, thus allowing mobile stations to roam freely within and between networks.
- the HLR component contains information similar to that maintained for mobile stations in a completely mobile-based system.
- the HLR component of the HLR/AuC 123 contains information regarding the subscribers interfacing with the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the individual CPE trunks connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 (such as CPE trunks 602 shown in FIG.
- each CPE trunk connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 has its own (preferably unique) subscriber identity number.
- the subscriber identity number may, as noted previously, comprise an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), which is a unique, permanent identifier of a CPE trunk assigned at the time of manufacture of the CPE 105 , or may comprise a mobile subscriber ISDN (MSISDN) number, which would be one of the public PSTN numbers assigned to the CPE 105 .
- IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
- MSISDN mobile subscriber ISDN
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may include functionality for keeping its non-mobile aspects transparent from the wireless network. For example, a mobile telephone subscriber may occasionally signal the wireless network to refresh the VLR on a regular basis. To keep the fixed wireless aspects of the system transparent to the wireless network, the wireless access communication unit 106 may periodically perform network-level registration using, for example, a GSM periodic registration mechanism, to keep the VLR entries for the “subscribers” alive. The wireless access communication unit 106 may also perform network-level registration every time it registers through a base station 109 in a location area different from that of the base station 109 to which it was previously connected. Further details regarding initial and periodic registration may be found in, e.g., U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/987,872, previously incorporated herein by reference.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 handles acquisition of an over-the-air communication channel, mobility management connectivity, and call setup, and in addition is preferably capable of handling various error or exception conditions.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 detects a trunk seizure by the CPE 105 , the wireless access communication unit 106 marks the CPE trunk as “busy” and issues a dial tone (assuming that it is able to communicate with a base station 109 ).
- the wireless access communication unit initiates an over-the-air communication channel acquisition procedure.
- the dial tone is removed when the wireless access communication unit 106 detects the first dialed digit from the CPE 105 , or if it detects an on-hook from the CPE 105 prior to receiving any digits therefrom.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 preferably performs a thorough search of nearby base stations 109 to find a suitable base station 109 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 establishes communication with the base station 109 , and receives a surrounding base station map from the current base station 109 .
- the surrounding base station map provides the wireless access communication unit 106 with a list of neighboring base stations 109 that are candidates for over-the-air communication.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 builds up a base station selection table containing such things as signal quality information on the neighboring base stations 109 .
- the base station selection table is stored in non-volatile memory in the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 uses the existing base station selection table to speed up its base station acquisition.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 On receiving a trigger from the CPE 105 to set up an outgoing call or perform a registration, the wireless access communication unit 106 attempts to acquire an over-the-air communication channel.
- the acquisition of an over-the-air communication channel is accomplished by interacting with a control channel of the wireless system.
- the channel acquisition process may entail acquiring a time slot in a time frame established by the base station 109 . Acquisition of a time slot may be carried out, for example, according to a handshake protocol described in more detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,455,822, assigned to the assignee of the present invention, and hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 If the wireless access communication unit 106 is unable to find an available over-the-air communication channel for communication with the base station 109 , its next action depends on whether or not there are other calls active or being set up through the wireless access communication unit 106 . If there are no other calls active or being set up through the wireless access communication unit 106 , then the wireless access communication unit 106 searches the surrounding area to find a base station 109 with which it can communicate. If a suitable base station 109 is found (based upon, for example, received signal quality and traffic availability), the wireless access communication unit 106 attempts to acquire an over the-air communication channel on the new base station 109 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may look for a general polling message sent within a time slot, wherein the general polling message indicates the availability of an over-the-air time slot for communication, as generally described in the above-referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,455,822.) If the wireless access communication unit 106 fails to acquire an over-the-air communication channel, it may try again, or else search for a different base station 109 . The wireless access communication unit 106 continues with this process until it either acquires an over-the-air communication channel, or else a link establishment timeout period expires, indicating a failed attempt.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 marks the channel acquisition attempt as failed.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may attempt to set up the call with a different base station 109 , and thereby attempt maintain communication with two different base stations 109 (the one handling the currently active calls and the one handling the newest call) simultaneously.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 issues a “reorder” tone on the CPE trunk, and marks the over-the-air link status as congested. If the wireless access communication unit 106 has a ground-start trunk interface with the CPE 105 , then the wireless access communication unit 106 busies its idle CPE trunks by seizing them (i.e., applying tip to ground on each CPE trunk). So long as the congested condition is in effect, the CPE 105 attempts to route the calls that would otherwise be directed to the wireless access communication unit 106 to the PSTN 125 (assuming that the CPE 105 has call routing capability).
- the wireless access communication unit 106 While in the “congested” state, the wireless access communication unit 106 continues to track the over-the-air channel availability on the current base station 109 . Should the congested condition clear (e.g., it is able to see general polling messages from the base station 109 , or otherwise receive information from the base station 109 indicating available communication channels), the wireless access communication unit 106 then marks the over-the-air link status as “uncongested.” If the wireless access communication unit 106 has a ground-start trunk interface with the CPE 105 , then the wireless access communication unit 106 un-busies any CPE trunks by releasing them (i.e., removing tip from ground).
- the wireless access communication unit 106 proceeds with digit transmission and analysis. On detecting the first dialed digit, the wireless access communication unit 106 removes the dial tone and initiates a digit analysis procedure. In a preferred embodiment, digits are relayed from the wireless access communication unit 106 as they are received after the over-the-air communication channel has been established, and digit analysis is performed at the base 10 , station 109 . The base station 109 stores the digits and analyzes them, determining the type of call and the end of the dialing sequence.
- the base station 109 analyzes the digits as follows. If the base station 109 detects the digit pattern “X11,” where “X” is a “4” or a “9”, it will consider dialing to be complete. If the digit sequence is “911,” the base station 109 marks the call type as an emergency call. Any other type of call is marked as a normal call. If the first three digits are not “411” or “911,” then the base station 109 continues to receive digits, and uses a dialing-complete timeout period (of, e.g., four seconds) to detect the end of dialing.
- a dialing-complete timeout period of, e.g., four seconds
- a dialing timer is activated when the first digit is received by the base station 109 , and is reset each time a new digit is received.
- the dialing timer expires, the base station 109 considers dialing to be complete.
- the base station 109 On determining that the dialing sequence is complete, the base station 109 issues a trigger to the wireless access communication unit 106 to continue with call establishment, including mobility management connection establishment and call setup. This trigger also indicates the type of call (i.e., normal versus emergency).
- the MSC 116 takes appropriate action. In such situations, the base station 109 generally detects end-of-dialing and triggers the wireless access communication unit 106 to set up the call. The incomplete or invalid digit sequence is then filled into a DTAP Setup message by the base station 109 and sent to the MSC 116 . The digit analysis performed at the MSC 116 detects the exception condition, causing the MSC 116 to return a DTAP Release Complete message to the wireless access communication unit 106 , indicating that the dialed number is invalid.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 If the wireless access communication unit 106 should lose communication with its current base station 109 , or if the quality of one or more over-the-air communication links has dropped below an acceptable minimum (based on, e.g., high bit error rate, low signal strength, and the like), the wireless access communication unit 106 starts a base station acquisition procedure to locate a base station 109 that it can communicate with satisfactorily.
- an acceptable minimum based on, e.g., high bit error rate, low signal strength, and the like
- the wireless access communication unit 106 For a ground-start trunk interface between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the CPE 105 , the wireless access communication unit 106 “busies” its CPE trunks by seizing them, i.e., by applying tip to ground on each CPE trunk 602 . On completing base station re-acquisition (either by re-establishing communication with the current base station 109 or finding a strong enough RF link with a different base station), the wireless access communication unit 106 un-busies each of the CPE trunks that were busied out when communication with the base station 109 was lost or interrupted.
- each CPE trunk supported by the wireless access communication unit 106 represents a logical subscriber to the network, even though the multiple CPE trunks are physically connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 uses the IMSI assigned to that CPE trunk.
- each logical subscriber associated with the wireless access communication unit 106 is seen as a separate user, much like the separate mobile subscribers that can also communicate wirelessly with the base station 109 .
- the base station 109 generally need not know that a group of different IMSIs belongs to a single entity (i.e., the wireless access communication unit 106 ).
- the IMSIs are preferably held on one or more subscriber interface module (SIM) 606 chips, programmed at the factory. Each SIM 606 chip, once placed in the wireless access communication unit 106 , belongs to a specific CPE trunk.
- SIM subscriber interface module
- each IMSI stored in the wireless access communication unit 106 there preferably is a corresponding MSISDN stored in the HLR component of the HLR/AuC 123 .
- the MSISDN number may be the equivalent of the NANP number converted into an MSISDN number—i.e., a number in the format of 1+NPA+NXX+XXXX.
- the MSISDN number is used for such things as call origination and billing generation.
- the MSISDN number may be one of the public PSTN numbers assigned to the CPE 105 ; therefore, the MSISDN number may be assigned to the CPE 105 from the PSTN 125 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may be assigned an identifying serial number in the form of an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number.
- IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity
- the IMEI number may be assigned at the factory, and each wireless access communication unit 106 is preferably associated with a unique IMEI number. If an Equipment Identity Register (EIR) element is used within the network, it will contain the IMEI number of each wireless access communication unit 106 in the system. Alarms generated by the wireless access communication unit 106 may use the IMEI number for identification purposes.
- EIR Equipment Identity Register
- the invention provides in one aspect signaling techniques and protocols for facilitating communication in a system having a wireless trunk.
- Signaling information is transported across one or more of the various interfaces of the communication system 101 , so as to allow communication between the CPE 105 and the PSTN 125 to take place utilizing the capabilities of the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the communication system 101 incorporates aspects of the IS-661 communication protocol (or a modified version of the IS-661 protocol) and the GSM communication protocol, thereby employing a “hybrid” protocol.
- Various aspects of the IS-661 protocol may be summarized as follows.
- over-the-air communication between a base station 109 and mobile stations or other user stations is carried out using frequency division duplexing (FDD) wherein the base station 109 transmits over a base station frequency band, and the mobile stations or other user stations transmit over a mobile/user station frequency band.
- FDD frequency division duplexing
- Transmissions are distinguished according to time slots, with a TDMA time frame on each of the base station frequency band and mobile/user station frequency band comprising 32 time slots each 625 microseconds in length, resulting in a TDMA time frame duration of 20 milliseconds.
- a preferred frequency of operation is 1850 to 1990 MHz, with a synthesizer tuning step size of 100 kHz.
- Communication is carried out using spread spectrum communication, with a 1.6 MHz RF channel spacing.
- Spread spectrum modulation may be MSK or OQPSK with pulse shaping implemented using a root raised cosine method.
- the spread spectrum chipping rate is preferably 1.25 Megachips (Mcps) on each of two channels, an I channel and a Q channel.
- the system may provide for antenna diversity, and may also provide for power control of the mobile stations or other user stations in predefined steps (of e.g. 3 dB).
- FIG. 10 is a diagram showing interfaces between different components of a communication system 801 according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. Some of these interfaces have also been generally described previously with respect to the preferred base station 501 shown in FIG. 5.
- the different interfaces shown in FIG. 10 include an over-the-air interface or “O-interface” 560 between a wireless access communication unit 106 and the base station 109 , an internal interface or “I-interface” 561 internal to the base station 109 (i.e., between the OTA manager 502 and the line card manager 503 of the preferred base station 501 , as shown in FIG. 5), and a network interface or “N-interface” 562 between the base station 109 and the base station controller 112 .
- the base station controller 112 communicates with the MSC 116 over a standard interface such as the GSM A-interface 571 .
- a transcoding unit 115 is interposed between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 .
- an additional interface designated the “T-interface” is provided between the base station controller 112 and the transcoding unit 115 , and the transcoding unit 115 communicates with the MSC 116 over a standard interface such as the GSM A-interface.
- the “O-interface” 560 comprises one or more wireless, over the-air communication channels, each channel preferably (but not necessarily) including a forward communication link and a reverse communication link to support full duplex communication.
- the over-the-air communication channel(s) of the O-interface 560 may be implemented according to any of a variety of different multiple-access communication protocols, including protocols utilizing time division multiple access (TDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA), or code division multiple access (CDMA), or various combinations thereof.
- the O-interface 560 may include, in some alternative embodiments. wireless broadcast channels from the base station 109 that are used, for example, for transmitting control traffic and signaling information. In other embodiments dedicated broadcast control channels are not used.
- the base station 109 is part of a cellular network that employs aspects of FDMA, TDMA and CDMA for cell isolation.
- users are isolated, and multiple access is achieved, through TDMA.
- Frequency division duplexing (FDD) is utilized to permit 16 full duplex users to share a common RF radio frequency.
- Adjacent cells in the cellular network are assigned one of nine frequency channels and use a code reuse pattern of seven to achieve isolation between the cells.
- Direct sequence spread spectrum transmissions are used by the base stations 109 and the users within a cell, including the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- Spread spectrum communication reduces interference between cells as well as with respect to other systems (e.g., PCS systems) operating within the same proximity.
- Cells in adjacent clusters use a variety of interference rejection techniques, including orthogonal or near orthogonal spreading codes, transmit power control, directional antennas and time slot interchange (TSI).
- TSI time slot interchange
- FIG. 25 One possible communication protocol that may be used for communicating across the O-interface 560 in one embodiment of the present invention is depicted in FIG. 25.
- the protocol depicted in FIG. 25 makes use of time division multiple access (TDMA) and spread spectrum techniques.
- a polling loop 1380 (“major frame”) comprises a plurality of time slots 1381 (“minor frames”).
- Each minor frame 1381 comprises communication between a base station 109 (e.g., cellular station) and a user station (e.g., mobile user) in time division duplex—that is, the base station transmits to a user station and the user station transmits back to the base station 109 within the same minor frame 1381 .
- a base station 109 e.g., cellular station
- a user station e.g., mobile user
- a minor frame 1381 comprises a mobile or user transmission 1382 preceding a base transmission 1383 .
- the minor frame 1381 also comprises a variable radio delay gap 1384 preceding the user transmission 1382 , followed by a turn-around gap 1388 and a guard time gap 1389 .
- After gap 1389 is the base transmission 1383 , which is followed by another turn-around gap 1393 .
- the user transmission 1382 comprises a preamble 1385 , a preamble sounding gap 1386 , and a user message interval 1387 .
- the base transmission comprises a preamble 1390 , a preamble sounding gap 1391 , and a base message interval 1392 .
- FIG. 26 Another communication protocol that may be used for communication across the O-interface 560 is depicted in FIG. 26.
- the protocol depicted in FIG. 26 uses aspects of both FDMA (in the sense that transmissions are distinguished by different frequency allocations) and TDMA (in the sense that transmissions are distinguished by separate time allocations).
- one frequency band 1510 is allocated to a base station 109 for base-to-user transmissions
- another frequency band 1511 is allocated to user stations (e.g., handsets, or other wireless units) for user-to-base transmissions.
- a repeating major time frame (or “polling loop”) 1501 is defined for communication over each frequency band 1510 , 1511 .
- a plurality (e.g., sixteen) of base time slots 1502 and user time slots 1503 are defined within the repeating major time frame 1501 , with the user time slots 1503 preferably lagging behind the base time slots 1502 by an amount of time.
- the time lag 1505 between the first base time slot 1502 and first user time slot 1503 is a preset amount of time corresponding to a number of time slots, such as eight time slots, and is therefore referred to as a “slot offset.”
- This time lag or slot offset 1505 allows user stations time to receive transmissions over the base frequency band 1510 in the assigned base time slot 1502 , process the base-to-user transmissions, perform a transmit/receive frequency switch, and transmit a reverse link transmission in the corresponding user time slot 1503 , without having to wait an entire time frame duration to transmit a reverse link transmission.
- the slot offset 1505 can comprise an amount of time other than
- base time slots 1502 and user time slots 1503 can be assigned independently, with the spacing between a base time slot 1502 and a corresponding user time slot 1503 (i.e., a duplex pairing) being selected dynamically based upon, for example, the type of user.
- the user time slot(s) 1503 and base time slot(s) 1502 assigned to the wireless access communication unit 106 are offset by an amount of time sufficient to allow transmit/receive frequency switching of the radio transceiver at the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 requires approximately 625 microseconds to perform a transmit/receive frequency switch. which corresponds to half of a time slot duration if the time slots 1502 , 1503 are each 1.35 milliseconds in length.
- An offset of eight slots between the base time slot 1502 and corresponding user time slot 1503 so as to form a “virtual” time slot is presently preferred.
- a slot offset of eight is deemed, within the context of the preferred embodiment, sufficient to accommodate four trunks per wireless access communication unit 106 in the available over-the-air slot space, while reducing the potential number of transmit/receive frequency switches by the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 transmits to the base station 109 , at the time of negotiating a slot allocation with the base station 109 , a slot assignment map indicating which over-the-air slots are already assigned to calls on the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the base station 109 uses the slot assignment map information to pick a base time slot 1502 and user time slot 1503 from the pool of available time slots 1502 , 1503 .
- the base station 109 makes this selection based upon, for example, transmit/receive switching time constraints of the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- a single base time slot 1502 and a single user time slot 1503 collectively comprise a duplex communication channel.
- the time frame 1501 of the protocol described with reference to FIG. 26 supports sixteen base time slots 1502 and sixteen corresponding user time slots 1503 , for a total of sixteen possible duplex communication channels.
- each base time slot 1502 and user time slot 1503 is 1.35 milliseconds in duration, and each time slot permits 9.6 kilobits/second for the transmission of encoded speech or other data.
- the number of wireless access communication units 106 supportable by a single base station 109 is generally a function of the number of communication channels available at the base station 109 and the number of communication channels (i.e., CPE trunks) required by the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- CPE trunks the number of communication channels required by the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the base station 109 can support four wireless access communication units 106 , each operating at maximum capacity, at a given time.
- wireless access communication units 106 where it is expected that the wireless access communication units 106 will operate at less than maximum capacity for periods of time, and based on blocking requirements and expected subscriber loads, more than four wireless access communication units 106 could be assigned to a single base station 109 , with the wireless access communication units 106 using the base station 109 as a shared resource.
- the base station 109 may communicate with other wireless users, such as mobile handsets or other wireless devices, simultaneously with its communication with one or more wireless access communication units 106 .
- Communication channels are preferably assigned to the wireless access communication unit 106 on a demand basis, although they may, in certain embodiments, be pre-allocated as well.
- An advantage of dynamic assignment of over-the-air communication channels is that more users can be supported.
- over-the-air communication channels are preferably assigned based on requests from the wireless access communication unit 106 to the base station 109 .
- the assignment of over-the-air communication channels is carried out in the same fashion for mobile users (if any) that also communicate with the base station 109 —i.e., according to the cellular communication protocol for the network of which the base station 109 is a part.
- over-the-air communication channels may be assigned with the assistance of a dedicated control channel.
- Over-the-air communication channels may also be assigned according to techniques similar to those described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,689,502, hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. Any other suitable mechanism for allocating or assigning over-the-air communication channels may also be used.
- the O-interface 560 generally involves the direct wireless interface between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the base station 109 , several other interfaces, as depicted in more detail in FIG. 10, are involved in exchanging information with the PSTN 125 .
- the next interface in progression towards the PSTN 125 is the I-interface 561 .
- the I-interface 561 is internal to the base station 109 , and generally provides for, among other things, the translation of the radio messages to a format suitable for backhaul transmission to the network, and vice versa. Details of a preferred I-interface 561 may be found in, e.g. U.S. Pat. No. 6,094,575, hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. Further details of the I-interface 561 are also discussed herein with respect to FIG. 5.
- the next interface in the progression from the wireless access communication unit 106 towards the PSTN 125 is the N-interface 562 , which connects the base station 109 to the base station controller 112 .
- the N-interface 562 comprises both traffic and signaling communication channels, as described further herein.
- the N-interface 562 uses a fractional T1 service as the transport mechanism. Each fractional T1 link supports transfer rates from 64 kilobits/second up to 1.536 megabits/second. Each time slot on the T1 link supports up to four 16 kilobit/second bearer channels.
- the traffic channels of the N-interface 562 include non-aggregated 16 kilobit/second channels for carrying data (e.g., speech data) for one radio traffic channel (i.e., one over-the-air communication channel). Up to four such traffic channels can be multiplexed into one 64 kilobits/second T1 time slot. A single signaling channel is provided for each base station 109 for carrying signaling and OAM&P information, at a rate of 64 kilobits/second.
- the signaling traffic includes control information pertaining to the link between the base station 109 and the base station controller 112 , as well as signaling traffic relayed between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 .
- LAPD terminal endpoint identifiers are used for the transfer of signaling and OAM&P information between the base station controller 112 and a base station 109 , as well as control information between a local management terminal (if provided) and the base station 109 .
- TEIs are preferably assigned to the base common function (see FIG. 7, described below) and the transceivers which transmit and receive messages over the N-interface 562 .
- a base common function TEI is permanently assigned to a T1 time slot on the N-interface 562 , and is derived from the T1 time slot number.
- Transceiver TEIs are semi-permanent and are established from configuration parameters.
- SAPIs service access point identifiers
- a single backhaul transceiver is supported by the base station 109 , and hence in such an embodiment only one transceiver TEI is used.
- FIG. 7 shows in more detail the interface signaling structures for the N-interface 562 used in conjunction with a preferred embodiment of the invention.
- a base station controller (BSC) 702 is connected to a base station (OBTS) 703 over a plurality of logical links 711 through 715 , all of which are, from a physical standpoint, multiplexed onto a single digital timeslot channel (or DSO) and transmitted using pulse code modulation (PCM).
- PCM pulse code modulation
- transceivers 706 , 707 (designated “TRX1” and TRX2,” respectively), which are identified by terminal endpoint identifiers TEI B and TEI C, respectively, and a base common function (BCF) 705 , which is identified by terminal endpoint identifier TEI A.
- TRX1 terminal endpoint identifier
- TRX2 terminal endpoint identifier
- BCF base common function
- Logical links 711 through 715 may be categorized according to service access provider identifier (SAPI) type.
- SAPI service access provider identifier
- a SAPI type of “62” indicates OAM&P signaling
- a SAPI type of “0” indicates traffic signaling.
- one OAM&P SAPI logical link 712 and one traffic signaling logical link 713 are logically associated with one transceiver 706
- another OAM&P SAPI logical link 714 and traffic signaling logical link 715 are associated with the other transceiver 707 .
- a third OAM&P logical link 711 is logically associated with the base common function 705 .
- Signaling messages for traffic control are transmitted on two of the logical links 713 and 715 , one of each connected to transceivers 706 and 707 .
- Signaling messages carried by logical links 713 and 715 for interactions between the base station 703 and base station controller 702 relate to functions such as, for example, backhaul and radio resource management, and mobility management.
- Signaling messages carried by channels 713 and 715 also relate to end-to-end call control and mobility management signaling between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 , and are encapsulated within transport notes.
- observation counters and operation measurements sent by the base station 703 to the base station controller 702 , and encapsulated within transport notes, can be conveyed across logical links 713 and 715 .
- Messaging related to management functions is carried on logical links 711 , 712 and 714 , to the base common function 705 and transceivers 706 and 707 , respectively.
- the OAM&P messaging provides for management of the base station 703 by the base station controller 703 .
- the base station controller 112 is connected to a transcoding unit 115 over an T-interface, which is shown in FIG. 1 but not explicitly shown in FIG. 10.
- the T-interface links the base station controller 112 to the transcoding unit 115 over a T1 connection, which carries a variety of different links, including bearer voice channel links and signaling links.
- the T-interface carries a plurality of 16 kilobits/second bearer voice channels containing coded, encrypted voice and FEC information, along with inband signaling information between the base station 109 and the transcoding unit 115 (i.e., the endpoints of the encryption/decryption algorithms).
- up to four such bearer voice channels can be multiplexed onto one DSO timeslot.
- the bearer voice channels are processed for transcoding and rate adaptation functionality by the transcoding unit 115 , which formats the bearer voice channel data into 64 kilobits/second pulse-code modulated (PCM) voice data for relay to the MSC 116 .
- PCM pulse-code modulated
- the T-interface also carries one or more signaling links.
- the T-interface carries signaling links for OAM&P control of the transcoding unit 115 by the base station controller 112 , using a standard LAPD data link.
- the T-interface also carries SS7 signaling links between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 , each using one TI DS0 timeslot. The signaling information on these links is relayed transparently between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 through the transcoding unit 115 .
- the T-interface may also optionally carry the communication link between the base station 109 and the operations management center (OMC) 120 .
- OMC operations management center
- the transcoding unit 115 (if provided) is connected to the MSC 116 over a standard interface, such as the GSM A-interface.
- a standard interface such as the GSM A-interface.
- the functionality of the transcoding unit 115 may be incorporated in the base station controller 112 , which then would connect to the MSC 116 over a standard interface such as the GSM A-interface.
- the A-interface is depicted in FIG. 1, and is also denoted in FIG. 7 by reference numeral 571 . Details of the GSM A-interface are described in, for example, “Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to Base Station Subsystem (BSS) Interface; Layer 3 Specification,” GSM Recommendation 08.08.
- modifications are made to the standard GSM A-interface to support the features and functionality of the preferred embodiment or embodiments described herein.
- modifications may include, for example, using a T1 line as the physical interface to carry both traffic and signaling, and using ⁇ -law coding in certain geographical regions (such as North America).
- Signaling links for the A-interface in general, logically run between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 , whereas the bearer links span between the transcoding unit 115 and the MSC 116 .
- the transcoding unit 115 processes the 16 kilobits/second bearer links received over the T-interface, and generates 64 kilobits/second pulse-code modulation links towards the MSC 116 .
- the A-interface signaling channels carry signaling connection control part (SCCP) logical signaling links.
- SCCP signaling connection control part
- Signaling information carried over the A-interface includes SS7 signaling between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 for management of the link, A-interface radio resource management signaling, A-interface mobility management signaling. call control signaling between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 relayed through the base station controller 112 , and, optionally, OAM&P signaling between the base station controller 112 and the OMC 120 .
- the A-interface signaling traffic passes through the transcoding unit 115 (if provided), and the transcoding unit 115 , as noted, relays the signaling information transparently between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 .
- GSM and non-GSM aspects of signaling are utilized in a preferred communication system 101 in accordance with the present invention.
- aspects of GSM signaling and messaging are used within the communication system 101 such that the interworkings of the physical protocol are essentially transparent at the network level.
- a non-GSM physical layer is employed.
- communication with the MSC 116 is packaged using a GSM signaling format so that the non-GSM aspects of the wireless system are transparent to the network. Details of the various interfaces used in a preferred system have been described above, while details of signaling and protocols carried out within the communication system 101 are described in more detail below. While the signaling and protocols are described with reference to the specific interfaces shown in FIGS. 1, 7, and 10 , aspects of the signaling and protocols may also be employed using other interface configurations as well.
- FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a protocol architecture for one particular embodiment of the preferred communication system 101 , and further depicts a preferred relationship of connections among the wireless access communication unit 106 , base station 109 , base station controller 112 , and MSC 116 across the O-interface 560 , N-interface 562 and A-interface 571 .
- CM relates to connection management
- MM relates to mobility management
- OTA relates to the over-the-air protocol
- LAPD relates to link access protocol for the D channel
- IWF relates to an interworking function.
- “Ph L” relates to the physical layer
- “BSSMAP” relates to the base station subsystem management application part
- SCCP relates to SS7 signaling connection control part
- MTP relates to message transfer part (MTP Layers 2 and 3)
- OAM relates to operations, maintenance and administration
- NTS-MM relates to N-Notes mobility management
- NTS-RR N-Notes radio resource management.
- a preferred embodiment of the communication system utilizes the protocol architecture for the IS-661 mobility system.
- a preferred embodiment of the communication system uses aspects of GSM, as described in more detail hereinafter.
- the call control protocol is the GSM direction transfer application part (DTAP) call control entity, shown as the GSM-CM layer in FIG. 8.
- This GSM DTAP call control entity i.e., GSM-CM layer
- GSM-CM layer supports a variety of features, including (1) the establishment, maintenance and release of normal outgoing voice calls (i.e., originating from the CPE 105 ) between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 ; (2) the establishment, maintenance and release of emergency (i.e., “911”) outgoing voice calls between the wireless-access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 ; and (3) the signaling of DTMF tones from the CPE 105 in the network direction during active calls.
- DTAP GSM direction transfer application part
- transparent digit transmission is provided between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the base station 109 , since digit analysis is preferably carried out at the base station 109 .
- the system also preferably provides transport capability via control transfer (CT-TRA) O-Notes for DTAP protocol messages.
- CT-TRA control transfer
- a GSM DTAP mobility management entity shown as the GSM-MM layer in FIG. 8, is used end-to-end (between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 ) to run various mobility management procedures, including authentication and subscriber identification.
- Other mobility management procedures are supported on the O-interface 560 and the N-interface 562 as part of the protocols utilizing O-Notes and N-Notes, and are shown as the OTA-MM entity and NTS-MM entity in FIG. 8. These other mobility management procedures include location updating or network-level registration (both normal and periodic), IMSI detach or de-registration, temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI) reallocation, and mobility management connection establishment (for both normal and emergency calls).
- TMSI temporary mobile subscriber identity
- the GSM-CM and GSM-MM protocol runs end-to-end between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 , and the protocol messages are relayed transparently through the base station 109 and the base station controller 112 .
- the protocol messages may be encapsulated within transport O-Notes (CT-TRA) messages across the O-interface 560 , transport N-Notes messages across the N-interface 562 using the LAPD signaling link between the base station 109 and base station controller 112 , and BSSMAP messages over the A-interface 571 using the SCCP signaling link.
- CT-TRA transport O-Notes
- the over-the-air mobility management procedures are interworked in the base station 109 with N-Notes mobility management procedures, shown as the NTS-MM Layer in FIG. 8 .
- the NTS-MM procedures run over the LAPD signaling link of the N-interface 562 , and are interworked in the base station controller 112 with corresponding DTAP mobility management (GSM-MM) procedures on the A-interface 571 .
- GSM-MM protocol therefore runs partly end-to-end between the wireless access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116 , and partly between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 .
- Over-the-air radio resource management functions are provided by an OTA radio resource (OTA-RR) management protocol entity shown in FIG. 8.
- Such radio resource management functions include link acquisition, lost link recovery, bearer message ciphering, over-the-air slot negotiation and time slot interchange (in a TDMA system), digit transmission and analysis, assignment and mode change link release (whether initiated by the network or wireless access communication unit 106 ), base assist information, and surrounding base table information.
- the radio resource management is carried out as part of the O-Notes protocol by the OTA-RR entity.
- the O-Notes protocol over the O-interface 560 includes link layer functions to manage the wireless communication channels (i.e., wireless communication links). These link layer management functions include ARQ, cyclic redundancy check (CRC), segmentation and de-segmentation, power control, and the like.
- link layer management functions include ARQ, cyclic redundancy check (CRC), segmentation and de-segmentation, power control, and the like.
- the elements of the radio resource functionality requiring interaction with the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 are interworked by the base station 109 with the radio resource functionality within the N-Notes protocol on the N-interface 562 , indicated by the NTS-RR entity in FIG. 8.
- the base station controller 112 in turn interworks the radio resource functionality with the BSSMAP layer functions on the A-interface 571 .
- Radio resource management procedures such as channel assignment, channel release, and the like are initiated through BSSMAP procedures by the MSC 116 , and the base station controller 112 translates these into NTS-RR protocol procedures on the N-interface 562 .
- the NTS-RR protocol procedures for radio resource management include ciphering, assignment and mode change, and link release.
- the functionality of the NTS-RR entity includes procedures to manage the allocation and de-allocation of bearer channels on the backhaul link(s) of the N-interface 562 .
- the signaling link is based on the LAPD protocol.
- the BSSMAP messages are carried over SCCP connections.
- the SCCP and MTP layers are used to provide a robust signaling link between the base station controller 112 and the MSC 116 .
- BSSMAP procedures are provided on the A-interface 571 for supporting the functionality of the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- These BSSMAP procedures include, for example, assignment, blocking, reset, release, cipher mode control, and initial message.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may, if desired, be deployed in a fixed manner, certain mobility features need not be supported. For example, the wireless access communication unit 106 need not be required to support in-call handover to a different base station, broadcast channels, asymmetric channels, sub-rate channels, aggregated channels, multiple mode traffic, ciphering of signaling messages, or an over-the-air D-channel. Also, the wireless access communication unit 106 need not support incoming call paging, SMS call invocation, or call related supplementary services. Eliminating these features makes the wireless access communication unit 106 easier to implement, and simplifies support features required from the base station subsystem and other network-side components.
- Mobility management connection establishment for normal calls is initiated by the mobility management entity (i.e., GSM-MM entity shown in FIG. 8) of the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the mobility management entity sends a Connection Management (CM) Service Request message to the MSC 116 , with the Service Type field indicating a normal call.
- the MSC 116 responds by sending a CM Service Accept message.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 continues with normal call set-up, as further described herein and/or in related applications incorporated by reference elsewhere herein.
- the mobility management connection establishment procedure may encompass an authentication procedure. Such a procedure may be based on the DTAP mobility management signaling for authentication, and may run end-to-end between the MSC 116 and the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the mobility management entity i.e., GSM-MM entity shown in FIG. 8
- the MSC 116 transmits a CM Service Accept message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 continues with emergency call setup. For emergency calls the network need not invoke an authentication procedure.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may issue a reorder tone to the CPE 105 , and abort the call establishment procedure.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 preferably utilizes a mobility management connection establishment procedure in the establishment of a call connection
- the CPE trunks typically do not constitute mobile components of the system.
- the communication system 101 adapts techniques utilized in a mobile communication system for facilitating setup and maintenance of a wireless trunk 108 through the wireless access communication unit 106 . as generally described herein.
- Using aspects of a mobile communication system in the communication system 101 which includes the wireless access communication unit 106 has the advantage of allowing existing mobile communication system infrastructures to support a wireless trunk in accordance with the present invention, without requiring a separate base station subsystem or other dedicated wireless path to the PSTN 125 to be constructed.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 exchanges DTAP signaling with the MSC 116 to set up an outgoing call.
- the primary difference between normal and emergency call setup procedures is in the way the call is initiated.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a DTAP Setup message to the base station 109 with the Called Address field empty.
- the base station 109 fills in the Called Address field of the Setup message with the digits stored earlier as part of the digit analysis procedure, before relaying the Setup message to the MSC 116 across the base station controller 112 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a DTAP Emergency Setup message to the MSC 116 .
- the DTAP Emergency Setup message is relayed transparently through the base station 109 and the base station controller 112 .
- the MSC 116 returns a DTAP Call Proceeding message to indicate acceptance of the call request.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 If the wireless access communication unit 106 receives a DTAP Progress message from the MSC 116 indicating PSTN interworking, the wireless access communication unit 106 connects its speech path between the CPE trunk and the wireless communication link (e.g., an over-the-air time slot if the wireless communication channel is a TDMA time slot). The wireless access communication unit 106 then expects the call progress tones (busy/ringback) to arrive from the network (i.e., PSTN 125 ) inband. As the call progresses, the wireless access communication unit 106 translates the call progress signals received from the MSC 116 to appropriate tones or signals on the CPE trunk.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 translates the call progress signals received from the MSC 116 to appropriate tones or signals on the CPE trunk.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 receives a DTAP Alerting message from 11, the MSC 116 , the wireless access communication unit 106 generates a ringback tone towards the CPE 105 .
- the tone is removed under certain conditions, including: (1) a DTAP Connect message is received from the MSC 116 , indicating that the called user has answered the call; (2) the call is cleared from the network end, with a DTAP Disconnect or Release Complete message; (3) the call is released via a link level (over-the-air) release; (4) timer expiry occurs at the wireless access communication unit 106 ; or (5) the wireless access communication unit 106 detects an on-hook indication from the CPE 105 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 If the wireless access communication unit 106 receives a DTAP Disconnect or Release Complete message, indicating that the called party is busy, the action by the wireless access communication unit 106 depends on whether or not there is PSTN interworking. If the wireless access communication unit 106 has received no indication of PSTN interworking, the wireless access communication unit 106 issues a busy tone to the CPE 105 and starts a busy tone timer. The busy tone is removed by the wireless access communication unit 106 if it detects an on-hook indication from the CPE 105 , or upon expiration of busy tone timeout period timed by the busy tone timer.
- a busy tone is issued inband over the bearer path by the PSTN 125 , and is relayed through the wireless access communication unit 106 all the way to the CPE 105 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 If the wireless access communication unit 106 receives a DTAP Connect message from the network, indicating that a connection has been achieved, the wireless access communication unit 106 connects the bearer path if it has not already done so, and returns a DTAP Connect Acknowledgment message to the PSTN 125 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 In the event of an exception condition during call establishment, the wireless access communication unit 106 aborts the call establishment procedure. For a ground-start CPE trunk, it also passes a disconnect indication to the CPE 105 .
- Call clearing is also preferably supported, and may be initiated either at the CPE 105 or the MSC 116 .
- the CPE 105 initiates call clearing by issuing a disconnect signal to the wireless access communication unit 106 . If the CPE 105 is the calling party for the call, the wireless access communication unit 106 commences timing of a call clearing guard timeout period (of, e.g., 600 milliseconds), at the end of which it releases the CPE trunk, clears the cal using DTAP signaling, and releases any over-the-air resources.
- a call clearing guard timeout period of, e.g. 600 milliseconds
- Call clearing is initiated on the network side (i.e., at the MSC 116 ) by the transmission of a call clearing message from the network to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the response of the wireless access communication unit 106 depends upon whether the CPE trunk comprises a ground-start trunk or a loop-start trunk. If the CPE trunk is a ground-start trunk, then when the wireless access communication unit 106 receives a call clearing message from the PSTN 125 , it commences timing of a call clearing guard timeout period (of e.g., 600 milliseconds), at the end of which it delivers a disconnect indication to the CPE 105 , and starts a permanent signal timer, the purpose of which is discussed further below.
- a call clearing guard timeout period of e.g. 600 milliseconds
- the wireless access communication unit 106 waits for a disconnect signal from the CPE 105 and, after receiving the disconnect signal, stops the permanent timer and releases the CPE trunk. In parallel, call clearing with the network is carried out to completion, and the over-the-air resources for the call get released.
- the CPE trunk comprises a loop-start trunk
- the wireless access communication unit 106 receives a call clearing message from the PSTN 125
- the wireless access communication unit 106 starts a permanent signal timer.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 waits for a disconnect signal from the CPE 105 and, after receiving the disconnect signal, stops the permanent timer and releases the CPE trunk.
- call clearing with the network is carried out to completion, and the over-the-air resources for the call get released.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 If, after a predetermined amount of time (e.g., 60 seconds) of issuing the reorder tone in this state, the wireless access communication unit 106 still has not detected a disconnect from the CPE 105 , the wireless access communication unit 106 removes the reorder tone and maintains the trunk in a busy state, pending the receipt of a disconnect from the CPE 105 .
- a predetermined amount of time e.g. 60 seconds
- a dial tone is issued from the wireless access communication unit 106 to the CPE 105 when an off-hook transition is detected on an idle CPE trunk.
- a busy tone is issued (in the case of non-PSTN interworking only) when a DTAP Disconnect or Release Complete message is received at the wireless access communication unit 106 , with an indication of the called user being busy.
- a ringback tone is issued (in the case of non-PSTN interworking only) when a DTAP Alerting message is received.
- a reorder tone is issued during wireless access congestion conditions detected by the wireless access communication unit 106 , or upon expiration of a permanent signal timer, as described above.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may support transmission of DTMF tones during an active call.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 detects DTMF tones generated by the CPE 105 and converts these tones into DTAP signaling towards the MSC 116 .
- the MSC 116 upon receiving the DTAP DTMF signaling messages, re-generates the DTMF tones towards the PSTN 125 .
- DTMF tone signaling during an active call in such a manner is not generally supported by current GSM protocols.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 preferably supports two main types of registration: network-level and base-level. For both network-level and base-level registration. the wireless access communication unit 106 performs registration of two different varieties. referred to as “normal” registration and “periodic” registration. Thus, in one embodiment of the invention, four types of registration are supported.
- the two types of network-level registration supported by the wireless access communication unit 106 include normal network-level registration and network-periodic registration. Since each CPE trunk connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 is looked upon by the network as an individual subscriber, the registration procedure is typically carried out by the wireless access communication unit 106 on behalf of an individual CPE trunk. Each CPE trunk is separately registered according to its unique identifier (i.e., its IMSI). If the registration fails for a particular CPE trunk, the wireless access communication unit 106 marks the CPE trunk (or IMSI) as having failed registration.
- Normal network-level registration is carried out when the wireless access communication unit 106 is powered up, or when the wireless access communication unit 106 changes location area, i.e., it starts communicating with a base station 109 that belongs to a location area different from the one in which it was previously registered.
- the registration procedure may comprise a normal location updating procedure on the A-interface 571 .
- FIG. 28 is a call flow diagram illustrating normal network-level registration.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 upon power-up the wireless access communication unit 106 establishes a wireless communication channel (e.g., an over-the-air time slot in a TDMA system, such as described previously with respect to FIG. 25).
- the wireless access communication unit 106 transmits a service request to the base station 109 specifying that a logical link is requested for the transmission of operations and maintenance data concerning the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the service request may take the form of a Control Traffic Service Request (CT-SRQ) message.
- CT-SRQ Control Traffic Service Request
- the base station 109 responds with a control traffic acknowledgment message.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 then transmits one or more control traffic transport messages to the base station 109 including information regarding the subscriber identifiers (i.e., IMSIs) of the CPE trunks and the equipment identifier (i.e., the IMEI) of the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the base station 109 enters the mapping between the IMEI and the IMSIs into its equipment/subscriber table (also referred to herein as its “IMEI table”).
- the base station 109 formats an “alarm” message and sends an alarm to the OSS 122 with information identifying the wireless access communication unit 106 (i.e., its IMEI) and a message that the wireless access communication unit 106 has registered.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 releases the logical link by transmitting a Control Traffic Release (CT-REL) message to the base station 109 , as shown in FIG. 28.
- C-REL Control Traffic Release
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may perform periodic network-level registration. To do so, the wireless access communication unit 106 , after initial registration, periodically re-registers each IMSI (i.e., each CPE trunk), with a periodicity selected so that the duration between registrations is less than a prescribed time.
- the prescribed time may be an amount of time that is less than the record retention time of the visitor location register (VLR) at the MSC 116 .
- the prescribed time should also be selected as long enough so as not to be burdensome to the wireless network.
- the periodic network-level registration translates to a periodic location updating procedure on the A-interface 571 .
- the periodicity is configurable in the GSM network infrastructure.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 preferably also supports two types of base-level registration: normal registration and base-periodic registration.
- base-level registration each CPE trunk is separately registered according to its unique identifier (i.e., IMSI).
- Normal base-level registration is carried out when the wireless access communication unit 106 starts communicating with a base station 109 that is different from, but belongs to the same location area, as the one with which it was previously registered. Normal base-level registration allows the wireless access communication unit 106 to receive a new Surrounding Base Table, without having to change location areas. The base-level registration procedure translates to a normal location updating procedure on the A-interface.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 also performs periodic base-level registration by periodically registering each IMSI (i.e., each CPE trunk) with the base station 109 .
- the periodicity of re-registration is controlled by the base station 109 .
- the periodicity is configurable through OAM&P, and may be selected such that the re-registration period is. for example, 16 seconds.
- the base-periodic registration period can be used as a mechanism for monitoring the “health” of the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the base-periodic registration may serve as a “heart-beat” for the base station 109 to know that the wireless access communication unit 106 is still in communication with it.
- De-registration is performed by the system on behalf of each CPE trunk connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 when the wireless access communication unit 106 is powered off.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 when powered-off initiates a shut-down procedure that involves de-registration for each CPE trunk prior to actually powering down.
- an alarm message is transmitted to report the failure to the operator.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a fault notification (i.e., alarm message) to the base station 109 using a Control Traffic Transport (CT-TRA) message.
- CT-TRA Control Traffic Transport
- the base station 109 then sends a fault report to the base station controller 112 using the base station object as the fault entity.
- FIG. 29 is a call flow diagram illustrating alarm reporting.
- a wireless communication channel e.g., a time slot in a TDMA system, such as described with respect to FIG. 25
- a service request is then sent to the base station 109 from the wireless access communication unit 106 specifying that a logical link is needed from operations and maintenance type data concerning the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the service request takes the form of a Control Traffic Service Request (CT-SRQ) message.
- CT-SRQ Control Traffic Service Request
- the wireless access communication unit 106 is free to send alarm information to the base station 109 .
- CT-SRQ Control Traffic Service Request
- the alarm information may be conveyed in more than one physical message if necessary.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 releases the logical link by sending a Control Traffic Release (CT-REL) message.
- CRC Control Traffic Release
- the base station 109 then packages the alarm information into a base station alarm message format, and sends it to the operations management center (OMC) 120 and/or OSS 122 .
- OMC operations management center
- the format of an alarm message or alarm information sent by the wireless access communication unit 106 to the base station 109 may include multiple fields, including an identifier field, a failure type field, a status field, a failure cause field, and a log number field.
- the identifier field contains information identifying the wireless access communication unit 106 , such as an international mobile equipment identity (IMEI) number.
- the failure type field contains information indicating the type of failure that has occurred e.g. communications failure, quality of service failure, processing failure, or equipment failure.
- the status field indicates whether the wireless access communication unit 106 is operational or degraded.
- the failure cause field indicates the reason for the failure, such as a radio unit failure, line card failure, or unknown failure, for example.
- the log number is used track the alarm.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may maintain a log of triggered alarms, each having a corresponding log number. The logged alarm information may be used for debugging at a later time.
- the alarm report preferably identifies the failing resource if it can be identified.
- a fault table may be maintained in the control section of the wireless access communication unit 106 , so as to keep track of alarms in force. When ever an alarm is reported, an entry is made in the fault table. The fault table helps prevent the same alarm from being reported twice. The fault table may be cleared on power-on or reset.
- the base station 109 relays alarms initiated at the wireless access communication unit 106 to the base station controller 112 , using a base station alarm message format.
- the base station alarm message format may include multiple fields, such as a failure type field, fault severity field, failure cause field, and additional information field.
- the failure type field contains information indicating the type of failure (e.g., an equipment failure), the failure severity field indicates the seriousness of the failure (e.g., “warning”), the failure cause field indicates the source of the field (e.g., the wireless access communication unit 106 ), and the if) additional information field generally contains details regarding the failure and, in the specific case of an alarm from the wireless access communication unit 106 , contains a copy of the alarm message received from the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the type of failure e.g., an equipment failure
- the failure severity field indicates the seriousness of the failure (e.g., “warning”)
- the failure cause field indicates the source of the field (e.g., the wireless access communication unit 106 )
- the if) additional information field generally contains details regarding the failure and, in the specific case of an alarm from the wireless access communication unit 106 , contains a copy of the alarm message received from the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating authentication procedures, including division of functionality, in a preferred embodiment of the communication system 101 .
- an authentication triplet including a random number RAND, signed response SRES, and ciphering key K c are stored in the VLR of the MSC 116 , after being transferred upon request from the HLRIAuC 123 .
- the random number RAND is sent to the wireless access communication unit 106 , whereupon it is applied along with the subscriber key value K, to locally generate the signed response SRES and ciphering key K c .
- the signed response SRES is returned by the wireless access communication unit 106 to the MSC 116 for comparison against the SRES stored at the VLR of the MSC 116 .
- the ciphering key K c is used thereafter for ciphering transmissions across the wireless communication channel.
- Bearer ciphering at the user end is performed at the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- Ciphering of bearer information on the network end is preferably carried out at the transcoding unit 115 .
- Ciphering of signaling messages may optionally be carried out. Further details regarding authentication and ciphering may be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,580,906, and U.S. Pat. No. 6,097,817, both of which have been previously incorporated herein by reference.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 provides the capability to establish, maintain and tear down normal outgoing voice calls through a GSM-based segment that provides connectivity to the long distance functionality of the PSTN 125 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 and other system components provide wireline transparency to a CPE 105 by supporting standard signaling functions on the CPE interface, including trunk supervisory signaling, address signaling, and provision of call progress tones to the CPE 105 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 registers with a nearby base station 109 and also with the PSTN 125 .
- registration may generally be described as the process by which a subscriber (i.e., a CPE trunk 602 ) connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 identifies itself to the network. Since each CPE trunk connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 is looked upon by the network as an individual subscriber, the registration procedure is typically carried out on behalf of an individual CPE trunk, and may need to be repeated for multiple CPE trunks.
- FIG. 12 is a call flow diagram illustrating a network-level registration procedure.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 acquires a wireless communication channel (e.g., a time slot in a TDMA or TDD system, or a frequency channel in an FDD system, or other defined channel) to a nearby base station 109 .
- the wireless communication channel is acquired according to the particular protocol utilized by the wireless system.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 then performs a network-level registration procedure, according to the particular registration protocol utilized by the system.
- the registration procedure may involve, for example, a location updating procedure on the A-interface.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 performs network-level registration at regular intervals thereafter, with periodicity controlled by the network infrastructure.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may also perform network-level registration if it starts communicating through a base station 109 in a different location area from the base station with which it had been previously communicating. After registration, the wireless communication channel is surrendered, and the MSC 116 initiates a resource release procedure, as illustrated in FIG. 12.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 may also perform periodic registration with the base station 109 at regular intervals, with a periodicity controlled by the base station 109 . For each registration attempt, the wireless access communication unit 106 acquires a wireless communication channel, registers, and then surrenders the wireless communication channel, unless a call is in progress. If a call is in progress, the wireless communication unit 106 need not acquire a new channel, but can, if possible under the particular wireless protocol, send registration information over the existing communication channel. In addition to periodic base-level registration, the wireless access communication unit 106 also performs initial registration with a base station 109 when it starts communicating through a base station different from but in the same location area as a base station with which it was previously communicating.
- FIG. 13 is a call flow diagram illustrating a network level de-registration procedure.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 acquires a wireless communication channel (e.g., a TDMA time slot) to a nearby base station 109 .
- the wireless communication channel is acquired according to the particular RF protocol utilized by the wireless system.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 then performs a network-level de-registration procedure, such as an IMSI detach procedure, according to the particular protocol utilized by the system.
- the wireless communication channel is surrendered, and the MSC 116 initiates a resource release procedure, as illustrated in FIG. 13.
- FIGS. 14 through 19 are call flow diagrams illustrating dial tone, digit transmission, digit analysis and call setup for outgoing calls under various types of CPE embodiments, including PBXs and KTSs with different levels of routing intelligence.
- FIG. 14, for example, is a call flow diagram illustrating dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a CPE 105 embodied as a “dumb” PBX—i.e., a PBX without the ability to route calls based on analysis of the dialed number. As shown in FIG.
- the user 102 e.g., a telephone station, as shown in FIG. 1 goes off-hook, sending an off-hook stimulus to the CPE 105 (i.e., the PBX).
- the PBX 105 Upon detecting the off-hook signal, the PBX 105 issues a dial tone to the user 102 .
- the user 102 dials an access code (i.e., a predetermined digit, such as ‘8’) to access the wireless trunk offered by the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- an access code i.e., a predetermined digit, such as ‘8’
- the PBX 105 removes the dial tone and seizes a trunk connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 On detecting seizure of a trunk, issues a secondary dial tone to the user 102 .
- the secondary dial tone is delivered via the PBX 105 to the user 102 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 commences acquisition of an over-the-air communication channel. In a TDMA or TDD system, for example, this step in the procedure generally entails seizing an over-the-air time slot.
- the user 102 Upon detecting the dial tone, the user 102 starts dialing the digits of the party to be called.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 detects the first digit, after which it removes the secondary dial tone. If acquisition of the over-the-air communication channel has not been completed by this time, the wireless access communication unit 106 stores the received digits in a temporary buffer.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a control traffic service request (CT-SRQ) message to the base station 109 requesting service from the digit analysis application in the base station 109 .
- the base station 109 commences the digit analysis application, and returns a control traffic acknowledgment (CT-ACK) message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 then transmits the digits received from the user 102 to the base station 109 one-by-one as they are received from the user 102 . Each digit is sent as part of a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message.
- CT-TRA control traffic transport
- each digit may be indicated by a field of, e.g., four bits in the CT-TRA; TRA message.
- the base station 109 stores each received digit. After all address digits have been received at the base station 109 , the base station 109 detects that the dialing sequence is complete (according to its digit analysis), and returns a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message to the central call processing unit 106 , with a message content indicating that dialing is complete. The wireless access communication unit 106 is then able to proceed with the launching of the call.
- CT-TRA control traffic transport
- FIG. 15 is similar to FIG. 14, but illustrates dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a CPE 105 embodied as a “dumb” KTS, i.e., a key type system without the ability to route calls based on analysis of the dialed number.
- the user 102 first selects an outgoing line to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the user 102 then goes off-hook, sending an off-hook stimulus to the CPE 105 (i.e., the KTS).
- the CPE 105 seizes a trunk connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 detects the trunk seizure, and in response issues a dial tone to the user 102 . In parallel with applying the dial tone, the wireless access communication unit proceeds to acquire an over-the-air communication channel. In a TDMA or TDD system, this step generally entails seizing an over-the-air time slot.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 When the user 102 detects the dial tone, the user 102 starts dialing the digits of the party to be called. After detecting the first digit, the wireless access communication unit 106 removes the dial tone. If acquisition of the over-the-air communication channel has not been completed by this time, the wireless access communication unit 106 stores the digits in a temporary buffer.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a control traffic service request (CT-SRQ) message to the base station 109 , as shown in FIG. 15, requesting service from the digit analysis application in the base station 109 .
- the base station 109 commences the digit analysis application, and returns a control traffic acknowledgment (CT-ACK) message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 then transmits the digits received from the user 102 to the base station 109 one-by-one as they are received from the user 102 .
- Each digit is sent as part of a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message, as described with respect to FIG. 14.
- the base station 109 stores each received digit.
- CT-TRA control traffic transport
- the base station 109 After all address digits have been received at the base station 109 , the base station 109 detects that the dialing sequence is complete (according to its digit analysis), and returns a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message to the central call processing unit 106 , with a message content indicating that dialing is complete. The wireless access communication unit 106 is then able to proceed with the launching of the call.
- CT-TRA control traffic transport
- FIG. 16 in a fashion similar to FIGS. 14 and 16, illustrates dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis, but for a CPE 105 embodied as a PBX system which has sufficient built-in intelligence to route calls based on analysis of the dialed number.
- the user 102 first goes off-hook, sending an off-hook stimulus to the CPE 105 (i.e., the PBX).
- the CPE 105 Upon detecting the off-hook signal, the CPE 105 issues a dial tone to the user 102 .
- the user 102 dials an access code (i.e., a predetermined digit, such as ‘8’ or ‘9’) to access an outside line.
- an access code i.e., a predetermined digit, such as ‘8’ or ‘9’
- the CPE 105 Upon detecting the access code digit, the CPE 105 removes the dial tone and starts digit analysis. On detecting that the dialed number is the predetermined digit of the access code, the CPE 105 issues a secondary dial tone to the user 102 .
- the user 102 then starts dialing the digits of the party to be called.
- the CPE 105 removes the dial tone and starts digit analysis.
- the CPE 105 determines from its digit analysis that a complete telephone number has been dialed. The CPE 105 also determines from its digit analysis whether or not the call is long distance (e.g., the first digit of the call to be placed following the access code is a ‘1’), and if the call is long distance seizes a trunk connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 . If the call is not long distance, the CPE 105 routes the call directly to the PSTN 125 .
- the call is long distance (e.g., the first digit of the call to be placed following the access code is a ‘1’)
- the wireless access communication unit 106 Upon detecting seizure of a CPE trunk, the wireless access communication unit 106 issues a secondary dial tone to the user 102 .
- This secondary dial tone is muted by the CPE 105 on the user side—i.e., it is not passed along to the user 102 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 proceeds to acquire an over-the-air communication channel. In a TDMA or TDD system, for example, this step generally entails seizing an over-the-air time slot.
- the secondary dial tone is detected by the CPE 105 , the CPE 105 begins to outpulse to the wireless access communication unit 106 the digits earlier received from the user 102 as DTMF tones.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 Upon detecting the first digit (i.e., DTMF tone), the wireless access communication unit 106 removes the secondary dial tone. If acquisition of the over-the-air communication channel has not been completed by this time, the wireless access communication unit 106 stores the digits in a temporary buffer until such time as a wireless communication channel is obtained.
- the first digit i.e., DTMF tone
- the wireless access communication unit 106 After it successfully acquires an over-the-air communication channel, the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a control traffic service request (CT-SRQ) message to the base station 109 requesting service from the digit analysis application in the base station 109 .
- the base station 109 commences the digit analysis application, and returns a control traffic acknowledgment (CT-ACK) message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 then transmits the digits received from the user 102 to the base station 109 one-by-one as they are received from the user 102 . Each digit is sent as part of a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message.
- CT-TRA control traffic transport
- the base station 109 After all address digits have been received at the base station 109 , the base station 109 detects that the dialing sequence is complete, and returns a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message to the central call processing unit 106 , with a message content indicating that dialing is complete. The wireless access communication unit 106 is then able to proceed with the launching of the call.
- CT-TRA control traffic transport
- FIG. 17 is similar to FIGS. 14, 15 and 16 , but illustrates dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a CPE 105 embodied as a key type system (KTS) which has sufficient built-in intelligence to route calls based on analysis of the dialed number.
- KTS key type system
- the user 102 first goes off-hook, sending an off-hook stimulus to the CPE 105 (i.e., the KTS).
- the CPE 105 Upon detecting the off-hook signal, the CPE 105 issues a dial tone to the user 102 .
- the user 102 then starts dialing the digits of the party to be called.
- the CPE 105 removes the dial tone and starts digit analysis.
- the CPE 105 determines from its digit analysis that a complete telephone number has been dialed. The CPE 105 also determines from its digit analysis whether or not the call is long distance (e.g., the first digit dialed is a ‘1’), and if the call is long distance seizes a trunk connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 . If the call is not long distance, the CPE 105 routes the call directly to the PSTN 125 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 issues a secondary dial tone to the CPE 105 .
- This secondary dial tone is muted by the CPE 105 on the user side—i.e., it is not passed to the user 102 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 proceeds to acquire an over-the-air communication channel. In a TDMA or TDD system, this step generally entails seizing an over-the-air time slot.
- the secondary dial tone is detected by the CPE 105 , the CPE 105 begins to outpulse the digits earlier received from the user 102 to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 removes the secondary dial tone. If acquisition of the over-the-air communication channel has not been completed by this time, the wireless access communication unit 106 stores the digits in a temporary buffer.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 After it successfully acquires an over-the-air communication channel, the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a control traffic service request (CT-SRQ) message to the base station 109 requesting service from the digit analysis application in the base station 109 .
- the base station 109 commences the digit analysis application, and returns a control traffic acknowledgment (CT-ACK) message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 then transmits the digits received from the user 102 to the base station 109 one-by-one as they are received from the user 102 . Each digit is sent as part of a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message.
- CT-TRA control traffic transport
- the base station 109 After all address digits have been received at the base station 109 , the base station 109 detects that the dialing sequence is complete, and returns a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message to the central call processing unit 106 , with a message content indicating that dialing is complete. The wireless access communication unit 106 is then able to proceed with the launching of the call.
- CT-TRA control traffic transport
- the wireless access communication unit 106 issues a dial tone (or a secondary dial tone) and does not receive digits from the CPE 105 within a preset amount of time, a dial timeout condition will occur. In such a case, the wireless access communication unit 106 releases any over-the-air communication channel that it may have seized and issues permanent treatment to the user (i.e., performs a de-registration procedure, if necessary, and causes the MSC 116 to release any resources allocated for the call).
- a dial tone or a secondary dial tone
- FIGS. 18 and 19 are call flow diagrams illustrating successful call setup procedures in two scenarios.
- FIG. 18 illustrates a call flow for a successful CPE-originated normal (i.e., non-emergency) call setup sequence, with non-PSTN interworking at the MSC 116 .
- provision of the dial tone, transmission of digits and digit analysis is carried out according to any of the scenarios illustrated in the call flow diagrams of FIGS. 14 through 17.
- the call flow terminates with an end of dialing indication from the base station 109 to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 Upon receiving the end of dialing indication from the base station 109 , the wireless access communication unit 106 initiates a mobility management connection establishment procedure for a normal call. This procedure results in an SCCP link being established for the call across the A-interface 571 (assuming a GSM system), and further results in a mobility management connection being set up with the MSC 116 for handling the call. Part of this procedure may, if desired entail authentication and cipher mode setting procedures for the call.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a direct transfer application part (DTAP) Setup message to the base station 109 , as illustrated in FIG. 18.
- the DTAP Setup message contains an empty called party address field, and is directed towards the MSC 116 .
- the base station 109 intercepts the DTAP Setup message and fills in the called address field with the digits received from the wireless access communication unit earlier during the digit analysis step.
- the base station 109 then forwards the DTAP Setup message, via the base station controller 112 , to the MSC 116 .
- the MSC 116 acknowledges the receipt of the DTAP Setup message by sending a DTAP Call Proceeding message to the wireless access communication unit 106 , as illustrated in FIG. 18.
- a bearer resource assignment procedure is then executed on each interface of the wireless fixed-access system, starting from the A-interface 571 and progressing to the O-interface 562 .
- the bearer resource assignment procedure results in bearer channels being assigned on the A-interface 571 , N-interface 562 and O-interface 560 , and a switched connection being set up through the base station controller 112 .
- the MSC 116 sends a DTAP Alerting message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 provides a ringback tone to the user 102 , via the inband path through the CPE 105 (i.e., the PBX or KTS, or other similar system).
- the MSC 116 sends a DTAP Connect message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 attaches its speech path and removes the ringback tone to the user 102 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 responds to the MSC 116 with a DTAP Connect Acknowledgment message, and the call is then in a conversation state.
- FIG. 19 like FIG. 18, illustrates a call flow for a successful CPE-originated normal call setup sequence, but with PSTN interworking at the MSC 116 .
- provision of the dial tone, transmission of digits and digit analysis is carried out according to any of the scenarios illustrated in the call flow diagrams of FIGS. 14 through 17.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 Upon receiving an end of dialing indication from the base station 109 , the wireless access communication unit 106 initiates a mobility management connection establishment procedure for a normal call. Similar to the call flow of FIG. 18, this procedure results in an SCCP link being established for the call across the A-interface (assuming a GSM system), and further results in a mobility management connection being set up with the MSC 116 for handling the call. Part of this procedure may, if desired, entail authentication and cipher mode setting procedures for the call.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a DTAP Setup message to the base station 109 .
- the DTAP Setup message contains an empty called party address field, and is directed towards the MSC 116 .
- the base station 109 intercepts the DTAP Setup message and fills in the called address field with the digits received from the wireless access communication unit earlier during the digit analysis step.
- the base station 109 then forwards the DTAP Setup message, via the base station controller 112 , to the MSC 116 .
- the MSC 116 acknowledges the receipt of the DTAP Setup message by sending a DTAP Call Proceeding message to the wireless access communication unit 106 , as illustrated in FIG. 18.
- a bearer resource assignment procedure is then executed on each interface of the wireless fixed-access system, starting from the A-interface and progressing to the O-interface, similar to the call flow of FIG. 18.
- the bearer resource assignment procedure results in bearer channels being assigned on the A-interface, N-interface and O-interface, and a switched connection being set up through the base station controller 112 .
- the MSC 116 sends a DTAP Progress message to the wireless access communication unit 106 , indicating interworking with the PSTN 125 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 attaches its speech path at this point.
- the network senses the ringback tone over the connected speech path, and the ringback tone is relayed by the wireless access communication unit 106 to the user 102 , via the CPE 105 (i.e., the KTS or PBX, or other similar system).
- the CPE 105 i.e., the KTS or PBX, or other similar system.
- the MSC 116 sends a DTAP Connect message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 responds with a DTAP Connect Acknowledgment message, and the call then moves to a conversation state.
- a busy tone is sent from the wireless access communication unit 106 to the user 102 in response to a DTAP Disconnect message from the MSC 116 , and a DTAP release procedure is initiated.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 initiates a call resource release procedure.
- the busy tone is sent from the PSTN 125 .
- the CPE 105 detects an on-hook signal from the user 102 , it sends a disconnect message to the wireless access communication unit 106 , which then initiates a DTAP release procedure followed by a call resource release procedure.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 In the case of ISDN interworking on the long-distance network interface, the wireless access communication unit 106 generates the appropriate call progress tones to the CPE 105 based on DTAP signaling received from the MSC 116 . Such call progress tones include busy tones and ringback tones, for example. In case of PSTN interworking, these call progress tones are generated by the PSTN 125 and passed inband to the wireless access communication unit 106 , which relays them to the CPE 105 . The dial tone is always generated by the wireless access communication unit 106 . Also, a reorder tone may be generated by the wireless access communication unit 106 during congestion conditions or as part of permanent treatment.
- FIG. 20 illustrates a call flow for a call waiting situation during an active call.
- a first user is engaged in an active call over the network.
- a second user desires to place a call to the first user, and causes an off-hook signal to be generated.
- the CPE 105 i.e., KTS, PBX or similar type system
- the second user dials the telephone number of the first user, and because the call is not long distance (but rather is station-to-station) it is handled by the CPE 105 itself rather then sending it to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the CPE 105 Upon detecting the first digit from the second user, the CPE 105 removes the dial tone.
- the CPE 105 After the number is dialed the CPE 105 attempts to deliver the call to the first user. Knowing that the first user is already engaged in a call, the CPE 105 issues a call waiting tone to the first user, indicating to the first user that another caller is attempting contact. The CPE 105 also issues a ringback tone to the second user, to indicate that the first user is being paged.
- the CPE 105 detects the hook flash signal and places the initial conversation on hold. The CPE 105 then connects the first user and the second user in a conversation. The first user can then toggle between conversations by using the hook flash signal, as illustrated in FIG. 20.
- FIG. 21 is a call flow diagram illustrating a three-way call setup scenario.
- a first user is already engaged in an active call over the network.
- the first user decides to place a station-to-station call to a second user.
- the first user delivers a hook-flash signal to the CPE 105 .
- the CPE 105 responds by providing a recall dial tone to the first user, and by placing the original conversation on hold.
- the first user then dials the second user's extension.
- the CPE 105 detects the first digit of the dialed extension, it terminates the recall dial tone.
- the CPE 105 After the dialing of the extension is complete, the CPE 105 attempts to deliver the call to the second user. At the same time, the CPE 105 delivers a ringback tone to the first user. When the CPE 105 receives an off-hook signal from the second user, it terminates the ringback tone to the first user. The first user and second user are then able to converse in an active call. Upon detecting a hook flash signal from the first user, the CPE 105 connects the two calls so as to effectuate a three-way call.
- the call feature is provided to the end users in a transparent manner. Likewise, the calls are effectuated over the PSTN 125 in a manner transparent to it as well.
- FIG. 22 illustrates a DTMF signaling procedure during an active call from the CPE 105 to the PSTN 125 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 On detecting a DTMF tone from the CPE 105 which exceeds a predefined minimum DTMF timeout period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), the wireless access communication unit 106 sends a DTAP Start DTMF message to the MSC 116 .
- the DTAP Start DTMF message indicates that a digit is being sent.
- the MSC 116 receives this message, it re-generates the DTMF tone towards the network, and returns a DTAP Start DTMF Acknowledgment message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the wireless access communication unit 106 detects the DTAP Start DTMF Acknowledgment message, it sends a DTAP Stop DTMF message to the MSC 116 .
- the MSC stops sending the DTMF tone towards the network.
- the MSC 116 returns a DTAP Stop DTMF Acknowledgment message to the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- the procedure is repeated for each DTMF tone sent by the CPE 105 .
- the DTAP Start DTMF message and DTAP Stop DTMF message are both messages supported by existing GSM protocol.
- the wireless access communication unit 106 makes use of the DTAP Start DTMF message and DTAP Stop DTMF message to transfer information relating to DTMF tones during an active call, in a transparent manner to the base station 109 and base station controller 112 .
- the DTMF tones can thereby be related across the wireless communication channel and regenerated at the MSC 116 before being relayed to the network.
- Both normal and emergency calls can be handled by the preferred communication system 101 of FIG. 1.
- Emergency calls i.e., “911” calls
- the CPE 105 is preferably routed by the CPE 105 directly to the PSTN 125 . This may be accomplished in the same manner other calls are routed.
- the user may dial a PSTN access code for an emergency call (in the case of a PBX), or may select a PSTN trunk from the desksets (in the case of a KTS).
- the CPE 105 can be configured to route emergency calls to a PSTN trunk by analyzing the received digits. It may nevertheless be desirable to provide the wireless access communication unit 106 with the capability to establish, maintain and tear down emergency calls if it receives a trigger to initiate such a call. The wireless access communication unit 106 may perform these emergency call operations using a GSM-based segment.
- FIGS. 23 and 24 are frequency distribution diagrams illustrating alternative spectral allocations for wireless resources in two particular embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 23 shows a possible spectral allocation over an available over-the-air frequency bandwidth of 5 MHz.
- a 5 MHz bandwidth may be divided into three sub-bands having center frequencies spaced 1.6 MHz apart, and having 0.9 MHz spacing from each peripheral center frequency to the outer edge of the 5 MHz bandwidth.
- FIG. 24 shows a possible spectral allocation over an available over-the-air frequency bandwidth of 6.6 MHz. As shown in FIG.
- a 6.6 MHz bandwidth may be divided into four sub-bands having center frequencies spaced 1.6 MHz apart, and having 0.9 MHz spacing from each peripheral center frequency to the outer edge of the 6.6 MHz bandwidth.
- a wireless transmitter (at either the base station 109 or the wireless access communication unit 106 ) transmits a signal, preferably a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, having a maximum bandwidth of approximately 1.6 MHz. The particular spectral allocations in FIGS.
- 23 and 24 are meant to be illustrative only, and illustrate possible spectral allocations for a preferred spread spectrum wireless communication path; however, any spectral allocation may be made serving the purposes of the particular wireless connection utilized between the base station 109 and the wireless access communication unit 106 .
- a local area communication system may be comparatively easy to deploy in remote and/or rural areas, in contrast to systems requiring landline connections from a PBX or KTS to the network.
- a remotely-located local area communication system can obtain benefits of a wireless network (including long distance access) for relatively little extra deployment effort.
Landscapes
- Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Finance (AREA)
- Economics (AREA)
- Accounting & Taxation (AREA)
- Marketing (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Development Economics (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
- Strategic Management (AREA)
- Human Resources & Organizations (AREA)
- Tourism & Hospitality (AREA)
- Quality & Reliability (AREA)
- Operations Research (AREA)
- Entrepreneurship & Innovation (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
A communication system having a wireless trunk for connecting multiple phone lines over wireless communication links to a cellular network comprises a central telephone switch, such as a private branch exchange or key system, connected through one or more trunk lines to a wireless access communication unit. The wireless access communication unit preferably comprises a separate subscriber interface for each trunk line from the central telephone switch. The wireless access communication unit collects data from each of the subscriber interfaces, formats the data into a format compatible with an over-the-air protocol, and transmits the information over one or more wireless channels to a cellular base station. The wireless access communication unit thereby connects calls received from the central telephone switch's trunk lines over a wireless trunk to a network.
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/812,534, filed Mar. 19, 2001, pending, which is a continuation of U.S. Pat. No. 6,208,627 and is incorporated herewith.
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The field of the present invention relates to a method and system for providing communication services.
- 2. Background
- Localized telephone switching systems such as private branch exchanges (PBXs) and key type systems have for many years been available to business offices and other establishments as an alternative or adjunct to public telephone service. A PBX or key system allows users connected to the system to place intra-system telephone calls without accessing the public telephone service. Such a system can provide significant economic benefits particularly if intra-system telephone traffic is heavy.
- On the other hand, when callers using a PBX or key system need to place a call to a party not connected to the system, such outside calls must typically be routed through the PBX or key system controller over landlines to the public telephone company. To accommodate such dual functionality (i.e., intra-system call support and outside call support), special-purpose telephones have been developed for connection to a PBX or key system to allow manual routing of telephone calls. For example, deskset telephones can be provided with buttons corresponding to different telephone lines. By depressing the appropriate button, the user selects between certain designated lines for calls within the system, or different designated lines for calls over the public telephone network.
- In other PBX and key systems call routing over the selected lines may be automatic. For example, the user may select an intra-system call or a call over the public telephone network according to the first digit dialed, and the PBX or key system then analyzes the first digit and routes the call to the proper destination using the appropriate vehicle.
- While PBX and key systems are useful for providing economical coverage within a private local telephone system, for long distance the PBX users or key system users may still be required to rely on a local exchange carrier (LEC) whose landlines are connected to the PBX. The local exchange carrier then routes the call to along distance carrier. Because the user must pay both the local exchange carrier and long distance carrier for each long distance telephone call, long distance telephone service can be quite costly, particularly if the volume of long distance calls is large.
- Besides high costs for long distance service, another potential disadvantage of existing PBX or key telephone systems is that deployment can be difficult or expensive in remote areas. For example, if long distance service or other public network services are required, then deployment of a PBX or key system is generally limited to where landlines have been laid, so that the PBX or key system can have a connection to a local exchange carrier which connects to the long distance provider. If no landlines are present in the desired deployment location, then it can be expensive to connect landlines to provide long distance access for the PBX or key system. Also, conventional PBX or key systems are generally not very mobile where they require an interface with landlines for long distance access or other types of public network services.
- There is a need for a communication system having the ability of a PBX or key telephone system to manage local area calls, yet also which can provide access to lower cost, reliable long distance or other network services. There is also a need for a versatile mechanism for allowing PBX or key type systems to achieve relatively inexpensive access to network resources and long distance coverage. There is also a need for a communication system that employs a robust, flexible protocol for providing long distance coverage or other network services to local users of a PBX, key system or other type of local area network.
- The invention provides in one aspect a communication system having a wireless trunk for connecting multiple phone lines over wireless communication links to a cellular network. In one embodiment of the invention, a central telephone switch or customer premises equipment (CPE), such as a private branch exchange or key system, is connected through one or more trunks to a wireless access communication unit. The wireless access communication unit provides the CPE with one or more wireless communication channels to a cellular network. Calls may be selectively routed by the CPE over landlines to a network or, instead, to the wireless access communication unit, thereby bypassing landlines. Multiple wireless access communication units in a geographical region can communicate with a single base station of the cellular network, so long as the base station capacity and current traffic load permit.
- In another aspect of the invention, a wireless access communication unit is provided which has multiple trunk interfaces for connection to a CPE, and a radio transceiver for establishing one or more wireless communication links to a cellular network. Each trunk interface is connected to a line card comprising a vocoder and a subscriber interface. A controller interfaces the line cards with the radio transceiver, and assists in the conversion of data from a format suitable for wireless transmission to a format suitable for transmission over the CPE trunk, and vice versa. Data communicated between the wireless access communication unit and the network may be encrypted at the wireless access communication unit and decrypted at the mobile switching center or else at a separate transcoding unit interposed between the mobile switching center and the base station subsystem.
- In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the wireless access communication unit operates according to a protocol utilizing aspects of frequency division multiple access (FDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA) and/or code division multiple access (CDMA), whereby communication channels are assigned to the wireless communication unit on a demand basis. In a preferred embodiment, communication between the wireless access communication unit and a base station of the cellular network is carried out over a plurality of wireless duplex communication channels, one channel for each CPE trunk, with base transmissions in time slots on one frequency band and user transmissions (including those from the wireless access communication unit) in time slots on a different frequency band. In such an embodiment, the user time slots may be offset in time from the base time slots, and radio transmissions may be carried out using spread spectrum techniques.
- In another aspect of the invention, the wireless access communication unit registers each CPE trunk to which it is connected such that each CPE trunk appears as a subscriber to the network. Each CPE trunk may therefore be addressed by a unique subscriber identifier.
- The wireless access communication unit preferably utilizes aspects of GSM signaling to communicate information to the network, such that communication with a GSM-based network is carried out transparently by the wireless access communication unit.
- In yet another aspect of the invention, the wireless access communication unit periodically re-registers each of its CPE trunks. The base station receives and monitors the re-registration signals from the wireless access communication unit and, if the re-registration signals are absent for a predefined period of time, issues an alarm message to the network.
- The wireless access communication unit may be provided with a unique equipment identifier so that the base station can correlate the different wireless links to a single wireless access communication unit.
- Further embodiments, modifications, variations and enhancements of the invention are also disclosed herein.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram of an overall system architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a basic architecture for a wireless access communication unit in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 3 is a diagram of a software architecture for the wireless access communication unit of FIG. 2.
- FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a basic architecture for a base station.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram of a software structure for the base station of FIG. 4.
- FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating addressing of multiple trunks connected to a wireless access communication unit according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an interface signaling structure between a base station and a base station controller.
- FIG. 8 is an abstract diagram of a system protocol architecture.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a division of bearer path functions among a wireless access communication unit (CPRU), base station and base station controller components of a preferred communication system.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram showing interfaces between the different components of a preferred system.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram of multiple wireless access communication units in different location areas connected to a single base station controller.
- FIG. 12 is a call flow diagram for a network-level registration procedure.
- FIG. 13 is a call flow diagram for a network-level de-registration procedure.
- FIG. 14 is a call flow diagram for dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a communication system having a PBX.
- FIG. 15 is a call flow diagram for dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a communication system including a key system (KTS).
- FIG. 16 is a call flow diagram for dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a communication system having another type of PBX.
- FIG. 17 is a call flow diagram for dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a communication system having another type of KTS.
- FIG. 18 is a call flow diagram for a successful outgoing call setup without PSTN interworking.
- FIG. 19 is a call flow diagram for a successful outgoing call setup with PSTN interworking.
- FIG. 20 is a call flow diagram for a scenario involving call waiting.
- FIG. 21 is a call flow diagram for a scenario involving three-way calling.
- FIG. 22 is a call flow diagram for DTMF tone transmission.
- FIGS. 23 and 24 are frequency distribution diagrams illustrating frequency spectrum allocations according to two exemplary embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 25 is a timing diagram of an over-the-air protocol that may be used in the communication system shown in FIG. 1.
- FIG. 26 is a timing diagram of an alternative over-the-air protocol for the communication system shown in FIG. 1.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an authentication process.
- FIG. 28 is a call flow diagram illustrating network-level registration.
- FIG. 29 is a call flow diagram illustrating alarm reporting.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall system architecture of a
communication system 101 in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the present invention. In the system architecture illustrated in FIG. 1, a plurality oftelephone stations 102 are connected to acentral telephone switch 105. It will be understood thattelephone stations 102 could comprise telephones, modems, fax machines, or other devices that are capable of communicating over a completed call connection. Thecentral telephone switch 105 will be referred to herein as a “customer premises equipment” or “CPE.” TheCPE 105 may comprise, for example, a private-branch exchange (PBX) system or a key system. The design of various types of PBX and key systems is well known in the art. - In the preferred embodiment depicted in FIG. 1, the
CPE 105 is connected to both a public switched telephone network (PSTN) 125 and a wireless access communication unit 106 (also referred to occasionally herein, or in the drawings, as a “customer premises radio unit” or “CPRU”). As described in more detail hereinafter, in a preferred embodiment calls are selectively placed over thePSTN 125 and the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 according to the type of call. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 communicates over a wireless trunk 108 (which comprises a plurality of wireless communication links) to abase station 109. Thebase station 109 is connected, along withother base stations 109 in adjacent or nearby geographical regions, to abase station controller 112. Thebase station controller 112 is connected to atranscoding unit 115, which is connected to a mobile switching center (MSC) 116. Optionally, thebase station controller 112 may be connected directly to themobile switching center 116, without theintermediary transcoding unit 115. Themobile switching center 116 is connected to thePSTN 125. - In addition to being connected to the
transcoding unit 115 or, optionally, theMSC 116, thebase station controller 112 is also connected to an operations and maintenance center (OMC) 120, which is in turn connected to an operations support system (OSS) 122. Themobile switching center 116 is connected to a home location register and authentication center (HLR/AuC) 123 and to theoperations support system 122, as shown in FIG. 1. Thebase station 109 may also be connected to alocal management terminal 121. - As further described herein, the invention provides in one aspect signaling techniques and protocols for facilitating communication in a system having a wireless trunk. Signaling information is transported across one or more of the various interfaces of the
communication system 101, so as to allow communication between theCPE 105 and thePSTN 125 to take place utilizing the capabilities of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. In a preferred embodiment, the communication system incorporates aspects of the IS-661 communication protocol (or a modified version of the IS-661 protocol) and the GSM communication protocol, thereby employing a “hybrid” protocol. Further details relating to preferred signaling techniques and protocols are described later herein, after a description of some of the basic components of a preferred system including the operation thereof. - In the
preferred communication system 101 shown in FIG. 1, calls may be placed fromtelephone stations 102 directly over the PSTN 125 (i.e., over a landline connection), or over thewireless trunk 108 to thePSTN 125 by utilizing the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. When a call is to be initiated at one of thetelephone stations 102, it may be routed either directly to thePSTN 125 or to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The routing of the call may be either based on manual selection, or accomplished automatically based on the number dialed, as further described herein. In a preferred embodiment, local telephone calls are routed directly to thePSTN 125, while long distance telephone calls are routed through the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - Operation of the system shown in FIG. 1 may depend in part on the nature of the
CPE 105. As noted previously, theCPE 105 may comprise, for example, a PBX or a key-type system. In an embodiment where theCPE 105 comprises a PBX, the PBX is preferably capable of routing an outgoing call placed from atelephone station 102 to thePSTN 125 or to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 based on either an access digit or the telephone number dialed by the user. The user may, for example, dial a certain first digit (e.g., an ‘8’) for access to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, and a different first digit (e.g., a ‘9’) for direct LEC access to thePSTN 125. In this manner, the user could, for example, access the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to make outgoing long distance telephone calls, or thePSTN 125 for other types of outgoing calls. Alternatively, some types of PBXs can be configured to analyze the dialed number, and to route long distance and local calls. Utilizing this ability, the PBX can be configured to route long distance calls through the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and local or emergency calls through thePSTN 125. - In an embodiment where the
CPE 105 comprises a key system, the user may manually select a line (either for the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 or the PSTN 125) by depressing a key on the telephone deskset. The user could, for example, select thecall processing unit 106 for outgoing long distance calls, and thePSTN 125 for other types of outgoing calls. Some key systems can, like certain PBXs, be configured to analyze the dialed number, and to route a call either to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 or thePSTN 125 depending on the initial digits of the call and/or the number of digits dialed. In this manner, the key system can, for example, be configured to route long distance calls through the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, and local or emergency calls through thePSTN 125. - In alternative embodiments, the system may be configured with less flexibility but a potentially simpler architecture. For example, the system can be configured such that all incoming calls are routed directly from the
PSTN 125 to theCPE 105, and that all outgoing local calls (whether voice or data), all outgoing long distance data calls, and all TTY calls for persons with disabilities are also routed directly through thePSTN 125. In such an embodiment, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 would generally provide outgoing long distance voice communication capabilities. - The
CPE 105 is connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 across aCPE trunk interface 104. TheCPE trunk interface 104 comprises a plurality of CPE trunks, each of which may comprise, for example, loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks. The design of both loop-start trunks and ground-start trunks is well known in the art. As is also well known to the practitioner in the art, both loop-start trunks and ground-start trunks can be supported by the same local area switching equipment (i.e., the same PBX or KTS). - In an embodiment in which the
CPE 105 comprises a PBX, the PBX preferably has certain operating characteristics. In addition to supporting loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks (or both) on theCPE trunk interface 104 between the PBX and the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, the PBX also preferably supports DTMF address signaling on the loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks. The PBX may be configured to route calls through either thePSTN 125 or the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, as described previously, and therefore has the ability to identify which trunks lead to thePSTN 125 and which trunks lead to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The PBX preferably has the ability to specify the order in which the trunk groups are tried when an outgoing call is placed, and to re-route outgoing long-distance calls through thePSTN 125 instead of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 in case of access problems from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to the wireless system. - In an embodiment where the
CPE 105 comprises a key telephone system (KTS), the KTS preferably has certain operational characteristics. In addition to being configured to support loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks (or both) on theCPE trunk interface 104 between the KTS and the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, the KTS also preferably 11 supports DTMF address signaling on the loop-start trunks or ground-start trunks, and has the ability to route calls through either thePSTN 125 or the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, as described above. While not essential, the KTS may also be provided with supplementary call support features and a route selection feature (i.e., the ability to identify trunk groups leading to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and thePSTN 125, and to specify on the KTS the order in which the trunk groups should be tried). If a route selection feature is provided, the KTS should have the ability to re-route outgoing long-distance calls through thePSTN 125 instead of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, in case there are access problems from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to the wireless system. - The wireless
access communication unit 106 acts as the gateway for wireless trunk access to theCPE 105 via the wireless system, and correlates the individual CPE trunks with wireless communication links such that calls from theCPE 105 can be completed over a wireless network. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an embodiment of a wirelessaccess communication unit 605 connected to a CPE 105 (see FIG. 1) across a plurality of CPE trunks 602 (in this example, four CPE trunks 602). The wirelessaccess communication unit 605 also is connected over a plurality of wireless communication links (or “pipes”) 609 to a wireless network and, in particular, to a base station (not shown in FIG. 6). The wirelessaccess communication unit 605 establishes thewireless communication links 609 and correlates therewith theCPE trunks 602, so that communication for aparticular CPE trunk 602 is carried out over an assignedwireless communication link 609. Users connected to theCPE 105 can obtain access to the wireless access communication unit 605 (and, hence, to the wireless network) by being connected through theCPE 105 to one ofCPE trunks 602. In this manner, a potentially large number of users connected to theCPE 105 can have the ability to complete calls to the wireless network, with the number of users able to make calls simultaneously equaling the number of CPE trunks 602 (and wireless communication links 609) available. - Various components of the communication system shown in FIG. 1 will now be described in more detail. In addition, a detailed description of the preferred system interworking, protocols and related information appears hereinafter, and also appears in copending U.S. patent application Ser. No, 08/988,482, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,097,817 and 6,580,906, each of which is filed concurrently herewith, and each of which is hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein.
- The wireless
access communication unit 106, as noted, acts as the gateway for theCPE 105 to the wireless network, and preferably performs a variety of functions. In a preferred embodiment, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 performs off-hook detection for outgoing calls and supports provision of a dial tone to the CPE 105 (and thereby to thetelephone station 102 initiating the call). The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 also initiates acquisition of a wireless communication channel (such as an over-the-air time slot, for example, if the wireless network is a TDMA and/or TDD system), and initiates call control procedures. During call establishment, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects dialed address digits (i.e., DTMF tones) and passes the received digits via call control signaling to the network. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 decides whether to launch a normal or emergency call depending upon an end-of-dialing indication received from thebase station 109 indicating the type of call (based on digit analysis performed at the base station 109). In addition, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects off-hook transitions from theCPE 105, and initiates call release procedures towards the network in response to an off-hook transition. When a call is completed, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 provides landline-transparent control of disconnect procedures for clearing initiated by theCPE 105. As part of this function, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 implements the release guard times supported by conventional wireline systems. - In addition to the above functions, the wireless
access communication unit 106 also supports the signaling of DTMF digits during an active call. As part of this function, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects DTMF tones from theCPE 105 during an active call and relays the digits to the network via DTAP signaling. Also during a call, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may pass call progress tones received from the network transparently over the bearer path to theCPE 105. Whenever call progress DTAP signaling is received from the network, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 converts the call progress DTAP signals into call progress tones towards theCPE 105. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may generate reorder tones to theCPE 105 when needed, so as to indicate congestion of the wireless network or permanent signal timer expiry conditions to theCPE 105. - Additionally, the wireless
access communication unit 106 also preferably performs a number of functions related to bearer processing. For example, in a preferred embodiment the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 performs vocoding for voice communication. In this regard, vocoding includes encoding/compression of speech towards the network and decoding/de-compression of speech in the reverse direction (i.e., towards the CPE 105). The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 also preferably performs forward error correction (FEC), encryption and decryption for the bearer voice (with the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 andtranscoding unit 115 being peer-to-peer endpoints for ciphering), and echo cancellation functions. For encryption and decryption, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 encrypts the bearer data prior to transmission over the air (i.e., over the wireless trunk 108), and decrypts bearer data received from the network. Echo cancellation functions are supported by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 so as to suppress the echo potentially generated towards the wireless network if, for example, a 2-4 wire hybrid structure is present at the interface with theCPE 105. - In a preferred embodiment, the wireless
access communication unit 106 in conjunction with the wireless system supports management and security features such as call registration, de-registration, user authentication, ciphering of bearer information, and network management functions. In addition to providing a means for outgoing voice calls, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may also support outgoing emergency (i.e., “911”) calls and end-to-end DTMF signaling during active calls. - Details of a preferred wireless
access communication unit 201 are depicted in FIG. 2. and of a preferred software structure for the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 in FIG. 3. As shown in FIG. 2, the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 comprises a plurality ofsubscriber ports 203, which are provided for connecting the CPE 105 (see FIG. 1) to the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 across a trunk interface (e.g.,trunk interface 104 shown in FIG. 1). Eachsubscriber port 203 can support one call connection over the wirelessaccess communication unit 201, and may comprise, for example, an RJ-11 interface. While foursubscriber ports 203 are shown in FIG. 2, it will be understood that the number ofsubscriber ports 203 may vary depending upon the particular application or environment in which the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 is deployed. For example, the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 may be configured with only asingle subscriber port 203, or may have any number ofsubscriber ports 203 limited only by practical considerations such as the number of wireless communication channels generally accessible and available to thewireless communication unit 201. Also, thesubscriber ports 203 may comprise any suitable interface, with an RJ-11 interface being but one example of such an interface. - Each
subscriber port 203 is connected to an individual line interface unit orline card section 205. Thus, the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 comprises fourline card sections 205, one for eachsubscriber port 203. Theline card section 205 provides a physical subscriber line interface from theCPE 105 to the wirelessaccess communication unit 201, and in addition provides digitizing and data compression functions. - Details of one of the multiple
line card sections 205 are shown in FIG. 2, with the otherline card sections 205 being configured in a similar fashion. Theline card section 205 comprises asubscriber interface 207 which is connected to one of thesubscriber ports 203. - The
subscriber interface 207 comprises a subscriber line interface circuit (SLIC) 217, which provides conventional loop interface functions including battery feed, overload protection. supervision, and 2-4 wire hybrid. Both loop-start and ground-start signaling are preferably supported by theline card section 205. The selection between loop-start and ground-start signaling may be made, for example, by use of a manual toggle switch or dip switch (not shown) located on the wirelessaccess communication unit 201, eachline card section 205 may be individually configured to interface with a loop-start or ground-start trunk. Thesubscriber interface 207 further comprises a standard CODEC or, alternatively, a subscriber line audio processing circuit (SLAC) 215 which carries out analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion between theline card section 205 and the user station (e.g.,telephone station 102 shown in FIG. 1) connected to thesubscriber port 203. The CODEC orSLAC 215 provides a standard μ-law pulse code modulation (PCM) interface. Thesubscriber interface 207 also comprises aring generator 216 for generating a ringback tone. - A digitized data stream is output from the CODEC or
SLAC 215 and provided across signal line(s) 214 to avocoder 206, which compresses the digitized data stream into a compressed data signal. Thevocoder 206 comprises a relatively high-speed digital signal processor 211 (operating at, e.g., a rate of twenty million instructions per second or other suitable rate), along with support modules such as a high-speed static random-access memory (SRAM) 212 and anEPROM 213. Thevocoder 206 preferably provides, as part of its decoding function, an interpolation capability for deriving predicted speech patterns, so as to handle situations where, for example, the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 detects data frames that contain errors, or else the data frames contain errors that cannot be corrected by forward error correction (FEC). The decoding function of thevocoder 206 also preferably provides a mute capability for silencing the output to theCPE 105 when beneficial to do so, such as during control traffic exchanges. Thevocoder 206 outputs a compressed data signal at a rate of, e.g., 8 Kbps, which is sent to a control line card assembly (LCA) 226 located in acontrol section 220.Control section 220 thereby receives four compressed data signals, one from each of theline card sections 205. - Each
line card section 205 also hosts a subscriber interface module (SIM) 208. The general functions of theSIM 208 are to provide system security and store subscriber-specific information, including such things as subscriber authentication information and subscriber-specific data. In a preferred embodiment, the SIM function is duplicated for each CPE trunk supported by the wirelessaccess communication unit 201, as each CPE trunk may be viewed as a different subscriber by the network. This duplication may be explained with reference to FIG. 6. In FIG. 6, a plurality ofCPE trunks 602 are shown connected to the wireless access communication unit 605 (eachCPE trunk 602 being connected to asubscriber port 203 shown in the more detailed diagram of FIG. 2). Aseparate SIM 606 is associated with each of theCPE trunks 602. Thus, for fourCPE trunks 602, the wirelessaccess communication unit 605 comprises fourSIMs 606. The wirelessaccess communication unit 605 further comprises a plurality ofradio interface units 607, one for each ofCPE trunk 602, for the purpose of passing data and other information to the wireless transceiver (not shown) which handles the physical wireless communication links 609. - Generally, each subscriber within the communication system requires unique identification and possibly different system parameters. To the extent that the multiple CPE trunks (corresponding to the
multiple subscriber ports 203 shown in FIG. 2) are viewed by the system as individual and unique subscribers, each CPE trunk is associated with a unique identifier and, preferably, unique authentication and other system parameters, which are implemented at least in part with theseparate SIM 208 used in eachline card 205. Thus, for four CPE trunks (corresponding to the foursubscriber ports 203 shown in FIG. 2), four copies of theSIM 208 are used in the wirelessaccess communication unit 201. - The functionality of the
SIM 208 may be implemented as one or more non-removable SIM chips within the wireless access communication unit hardware architecture. TheSIM 208 stores within a non-volatile memory (such as a ROM, or non-volatile RAM) subscriber information such as a subscriber identifier. In a preferred embodiment, the subscriber identifier comprises an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) number. In addition to storing the subscriber identifier, theSIM 208 also runs an authentication procedure such as, for example, an “A3” and/or “A8” authentication procedure conventionally used in certain GSM applications. Further details regarding authentication may be found in copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/988,505, previously incorporated herein by reference. - The
control section 220 of the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 provides timing and control for virtually all aspects of the wirelessaccess communication unit 201. - The
control section 220 comprises aprocessor 225 which may comprise, for example, a 16-bit RISC processor (such as a C165 or C163 processor manufactured by Siemens Corp.) and associated support modules (i.e.,SRAM 223,flash memory 224, etc.). Access to theSIM 208 is initiated by thehost processor 225 and controlled and formatted by the control line card assembly (LCA) in thecontrol section 220. Theprocessor 225 also coordinates most system activities and moves data between the various modules. - The
processor 225 is connected to thecontrol LCA 226 which, as noted above, is connected to thevocoder 206 from each of theline card sections 205. Thecontrol LCA 226 is also connected to a radio interface line card assembly (RIF LCA) 227. Thecontrol LCA 226 provides the interface between the radio section and the line card section of the wirelessaccess communication unit 201. Thecontrol LCA 226 packages and formats data, and coordinates and controls the over-the-air (OTA) protocol. It thereby maintains coordination between up to four compressed serial data streams (one from each of the line card sections 205) and their respective over-the-air communication channels. - The
radio interface LCA 227 is connected to abaseband processor 228, which may include a digital radio ASIC (DRA) 229. Thebaseband processor 228 is connected to aradio section 240. Theradio section 240 preferably comprises a plurality ofantennas 243 which are selectable by aselector 242 which is connected to thecontrol LCA 226. Signals from one ormore antennas 243 are thereby provided to a radio transceiver 241 (possibly including multiple radio receivers, one for each antenna 243). In a preferred embodiment, antenna diversity techniques are utilized such that the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 selects the best antenna (and/or radio receiver) for each frame of time in which it communicates. Various antenna selection techniques are known in the art, or are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,085,076 which is hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. - The wireless
access communication unit 201 may be powered either through an externalDC power supply 250 or an on-board battery 251. Thebattery 251 may be used as a reserve power supply, being brought into service automatically if theexternal DC supply 250 is cutoff or otherwise unavailable. Apower section 221 for the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 may comprise local voltage regulators to supply required power to the logic and radio sections, and a switching regulator to supply any requisite loop battery voltage. - The wireless
access communication unit 201 may be provided with anLED 231 or other visual display mechanism(s) to indicate the status of the device to an observer. The types of status conditions to be displayed may include, for example, whether the power is on, whether the device is functional (i.e., all self tests have been passed), or whether the device is in service (i.e., is currently registered with a base station). - In operation, compressed serial data is transferred to and from the
multiple line cards 205 under the direction of thecontrol LCA 226. Thecontrol LCA 226 places the compressed serial data in a format suitable for theradio interface LCA 227. It also performs any desired encryption or adds forward error correction information. Thecontrol LCA 226 transfers the data to theradio interface LCA 227 which passes the data to thebaseband processor 228. Theradio interface LCA 227 keeps track of channel and timing information, and instructs thebaseband processor 228 to process the data according to the channel and timing parameters. In a preferred embodiment, thebaseband processor 228 comprises a transmitter for formulating continuous phase modulated spread-spectrum signals, or other types of quadrature or related signals, as described, for example, with respect to transmitters shown in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,629,956, 5,610,940 or 5,548,253, all of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference as if set forth fully herein. At the appropriate time intervals, as determined by theradio interface LCA 227, thebaseband processor 228 sends the data to theradio section 240 which converts the signal to the appropriate transmission frequency and performs any necessary filtering for transmission over the air. The frequency band utilized by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is generally dictated by the overall communication system within which the unit is deployed. For example, the frequency band may be within the PCS frequency band of 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz, or may be any other suitable frequency band or bands. - Incoming message signals are received by one or more of
antennas 243 and sent to theradio transceiver 241 for downconversion and/or filtering as needed. The downconverted and/or filtered data is then sent to thebaseband processor 228 which demodulates the received signal. In a preferred embodiment, the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 transmits and receives messages using a spread spectrum format. In such an embodiment. thebaseband processor 228 preferably comprises a spread spectrum correlator. A wide variety of spread spectrum correlators are known in the art, examples of which include embodiments illustrated or described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,629,956. 5,610,940, 5,396,515 or 5,499,265, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. - The
baseband processor 228 outputs, among other things, a received signal strength indicator (RSSI), which is used by thecontrol LCA 226 in selecting the best antenna 243 (and/or radio receiver) for reception of the incoming signal. After spread spectrum correlation, thebaseband processor 228 provides a stream of data bits to theradio interface LCA 227, which transfers the data to theappropriate line card 205 based upon the over-the-air communication channel over which the data was received. The data is then processed by theline card 205 and sent to theCPE 105 via theparticular subscriber port 203 connected to theline card 205. - A diagram of a preferred software structure for the wireless
access communication unit 201 is shown in FIG. 3. As shown in FIG. 3, the software of the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 is functionally divided into two main components, based on the physical interfaces supported by the wirelessaccess communication unit 201. These two main components are referred to in FIG. 3 as the line manager 350 and the over-the-air manager 351. - The line manager350 generally handles the CPE trunk management and communication between the wireless
access communication unit 201 and theCPE 105. In addition to CPE trunk management and communication interface functions, the line manager 350 is also responsible for call signaling, DTMF recognition, and transfer of collected DTMF digits to the over-the-air manager 351. The line manager 350 comprises a plurality ofline drivers 303 and a plurality ofSIM drivers 304, oneline driver 303 and oneSIM driver 304 for each CPE trunk supported by the wirelessaccess communication unit 201. Asingle line driver 303 andSIM driver 304 collectively comprise a CPEline software component 302. - The over-the-
air manager 351 handles the communication interface and link management to the base station 109 (see FIG. 1). The over-the-air line manager 351 is also responsible for receiving DTMF digits from the CPE 105 (via the line manager 350) and relaying the DTMF digits to the base station 109 (which ultimately conveys them to the PSTN 125), as set forth in more detail U.S. Pat. No. 6,526,026, previously incorporated herein by reference. The over-the-air line manager 351 also implements the over-the-air communication protocol, including end-to-end communication with various network entities such as thebase station controller 112 and mobile switching center 116 (shown in FIG. 1). Exemplary over-the-air communication protocols that may be implemented by the over-the-air manager 351 include, for example, the GSM direct application transfer part (DTAP) protocol, or the IS-661 over-the-air (“O-Notes”) protocol as described in the OMNI_Notes_RMT Protocols Rev. 02.03D (release date Jun. 30, 1997), appearing as a Technical Appendix A filed herewith, and hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. At the physical radio level, the over-the-air manager 351 of the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 preferably implements the IS-661 protocol as set forth in the above-referenced OMNI_Notes_RMT Protocols publication, or a variation thereof. - As further illustrated in FIG. 3, the over-the-
air manager 351 comprises a plurality of CPE line link objects 310, one for each CPE trunk (i.e., subscriber port 203) supported by the wirelessaccess communication unit 201. Each CPEline link object 310 provides the signaling resource for a single CPE line or trunk, and comprises several components which together form a signaling protocol stack. The components of the signaling protocol stack work together to interface with a CPE line to provide call management, mobility management and radio resource functionality required to complete a voice call, and the registration functionality required to utilize network resources. - Each CPE
line link object 310 comprises aCPE line manager 311, the purpose of which is to interface with the CPEline software component 302 for the appropriate CPE line or trunk. In a preferred embodiment, theCPE line manager 311 interfaces with a GSMcall management component 312 and a GSMcall registration component 313, both of which interface with a GSMmobility management component 314. The GSMmobility management component 314 interfaces with a protocol adaptation (PAL)component 315, which interfaces with an over-the-air state (OTA)machine 316. TheOTA state machine 316 is generally responsible for managing the physical radio interface, and communicates with the radio transmit/receiver interface and slot management (RTRX)component 321. - In operation, the
CPE line manager 311 signals the GSMmobility management component 314 to initiate connection establishment procedures, as described in more detail hereinafter with respect to the call flow diagrams appearing in FIGS. 13 through 22. TheCPE line manager 311 also controls transmission of DTMF digits to the network, the enabling of the speech path, generation of ringback tones, generation of a-busy tone (in non-PSTN interworking situations), and passing of on-hook indication to theCPE 105. In addition, theCPE line manager 311 manages CPE-initiated call clearing as well as normal and emergency call procedures. - The GSM
call management component 312,GSM registration component 313, and GSMmobility management component 314 provide a degree of GSM functionality relating to call management, registration, and mobility management, respectively. Theprotocol adaptation component 315 adapts, if necessary, the GSM signaling protocol to the over-the-air protocol (such as, for example, to the IS-661 over-the-air protocol). TheOTA state machine 316 implements the over-the-air protocol and, as noted, manages the physical radio interface. In addition to the multiple CPE line link objects 310, theOTA manager 351 further comprises ahardware services component 320 which provides a programming interface to the hardware (including hardware controlled by theline drivers 303 and SIM drivers 304) of the wirelessaccess communication unit 201. TheOTA manager 351 may comprise a real-time operating system (RTOS) 330, which may be a multi-tasking operating system, as well as a power-on/reset initialization (POST)component 323 and adebug port manager 322. - The
debug port manager 322, if provided, allows access externally to the internal status of the software, and also permits software downloads. - In addition to the above-described components, the
OTA manager 351 also comprises an operations, administration and management (OAM)component 324. The OAM component runs at the application level, and performs such functions as recognition of faults, creating and sending alarms, and communicating with the line manager 350 for call processing data needed in fault detection and alarms. The types of faults or failures monitored may include, for example, hardware failures (such as power supply failures, radio unit failures, line card failures, and so on), software failures, communication failures, and quality of service failures (e.g., unsuccessful call attempts per time period, time slot interchange requests per time period, unsuccessful time slot interchanges per time period. number of dropped calls per time period, channel quality as indicated by bit error rate, and so on), among others. Fault reporting may be coordinated such that a single fault that causes multiple failures due to the dependency of the software, hardware and telecom functions will result in a single fault being reported. - In one aspect, the functionality of the over-the-
air manager 351 used to support the wirelessaccess communication unit 201 may be viewed as a subset or modification of the functionality that would be used to support a mobile user application. For example, the mobility management interface (MMI) software component used in a conventional GSM system to support a mobile user is, in the software architecture shown in FIG. 3, replaced with aCPE line manager 311. Another difference over a mobile user application is that a logical instance of the signaling protocol stack is provided for each CPE line connected to the wireless access communication unit 201 (as opposed to having a single logical instance of the signaling protocol stack for a mobile user application), and the SIM driver is modified over a mobile user application to accommodate multiple SIMs (or their logical equivalents) by, for example, the provision of multipleindependent SIM drivers 304. Further, an ability is added to associate a hardware voice path from theCPE 105 with a base station communication link. The signaling protocol may also be modified, as further described herein, to support digit analysis by the base station 109 (see FIG. 1). DSAT and DTA adaptor software components conventionally used in certain mobile user applications are not needed by the wirelessaccess communication unit 201, and are therefore not implemented. - Referring back to FIG. 1, the wireless
access communication unit 106, as noted previously, interfaces with abase station 109 of the wireless system, thereby allowing ultimate access to thePSTN 125. A block diagram of apreferred base station 401 is shown in FIG. 4. Thebase station 401 comprises a number of separate components connected together by a common global bus backplane, as illustrated in FIG. 4. These components include adigital line card 404, an over-the-air (OTA)processor card 405, apower supply module 407, and a plurality ofradio cards 406, all of which reside on anelectronics module 420. Theelectronics module 420 is connected to an I/O module 421, which comprisesprotection circuitry 403 to prevent such things as damage from short circuits. Eachradio card 406 is connected, via theprotection circuitry 403, to one of a plurality ofantennas 403. Thedigital line card 404 is connected, viaprotection circuitry 403, to the PSTN 125 (throughbase station controller 112 andMSC 116, as shown in FIG. 1) over abackhaul line 430, and possibly toother base stations 109 as well over other physical connections. Thebase station 401 may be connected to a local ACpower supply line 425, if available. - In operation, the wireless access communication unit (identified by
reference numeral 412 in FIG. 4) transmits over-the-air messages to and receives over-the-air messages from thebase station 401. Themultiple antennas 411 andradio cards 406 are used at thebase station 401 for achieving antenna diversity. Typically oneantenna 411 is selected at a given time for transmitting or receiving over-the-air signals. If spread spectrum communication is being used, then theOTA processor card 405 may comprise a spread spectrum correlator and other baseband processing circuitry for correlating a spread spectrum signal received from the wirelessaccess communication unit 412 and converting it to data bits. TheOTA processor card 405 transfers data to thedigital line card 404, which formats the data and sends it over a backhaul to thePSTN 125 via the other intervening system components (such as thebase station controller 112 and MSC 116). Similarly, thedigital line card 404 receives data from-thePSTN 125, and transfers the data to theOTA processor card 405 which formats the data for the over-the-air protocol and transmits the formatted data using a selectedradio card 406 andantenna 411. - The primary functions of the
radio cards 406 are to transmit and receive RF data packs, to perform packet data integrity services (e.g., cyclic redundancy checks), and to support antenna diversity algorithms. The primary function of theOTS processor card 405 is to move bearer data between theradio cards 406 and thedigital line card 404. TheOTA processor card 405 also executes operations, administration, management and provisioning (OAM&P) requests from thedigital line card 404, communicates signaling information (using internal base station messages or “I-Notes”) with thedigital line card 404, and communicates signaling information (using over-the-air signaling messages or “O-Notes”) with the wirelessaccess communication unit 412. Various types of signaling information and formats therefor (including I-Notes and O-Notes) that may be transmitted across or within thebase station 401 or other system components are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,021,333, hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. - The primary functions of the
digital line card 404 are to handle link access procedures for the “D-channel” (LAPD) transport on thebackhaul line 430, to exchange bearer data between theOTA processor card 405 and the network-side backhaul components (such as the base station controller 112), and to multiplex and demultiplex bearer data on thebackhaul line 430. Other primary functions of thedigital line card 404 include synchronizing the over-the-air bearer frame timing with the timing on the backhaul line 430 (such as a T1 line), to provide translation between the OAM&P procedures supported on the network and radio interfaces, to map internal base station messages (e.g., I-Notes) to/from the LAPD transport on the backhaul, and to communicate signaling information (using, e.g., signaling I-Notes) with theOTA processor card 405. - A preferred high level software architecture for the
base station 401 is depicted in FIG. 5. According to the software architecture shown in FIG. 5, the software of thebase station 401 is split into two functional groups, one functional group relating to the over-the-air functions and the other functional group relating to the line card functions. These two main functional groups are shown in FIG. 5 as theOTA manager 502 and theline card manager 503, each of which preferably runs on its own processor board. Communication between theOTA manager 502 and theline card manager 503 may be carried out using a dual-port RAM (not shown) physically residing on thedigital line card 404. - Software for the
OTA manager 502 and theline card manager 503 may be executed using different processors. For example, in a preferred embodiment, the software for theOTA manager 502 is executed using a MC68430 microprocessor, while the software for theline card manager 503 is executed using a MC68MH360 microprocessor, both of which are manufactured by Motorola Corporation. The microprocessor for theOTA manager 502 is preferably the bus master and has access to the dual-port RAM via the global bus (i.e., the backplane). IS-661 signaling messages in the form of I-Notes and bearer data are transferred across the dual port RAM interface, thereby allowing signaling communication between theOTA manager 502 and theline card manager 503. - The primary high level functions of the
OTA manager 502 are to move bearer data between the dual port RAM and theradio cards 406, and to handle call control signaling between theline card manager 503 and the wirelessaccess communication unit 412. Other functions of theOTA manager 502 include radio resource management, terrestrial resource management, and OAM&P support. - The primary high level functions of the
line card manager 503 include mulitplexing and demultiplexing bearer data between the dual port RAM and the backhaul line 430 (according to a protocol such as CCITT I.460, for example, if a T1 backhaul line is used), execution of LAPD transport over the backhaul line 430 (using, for example, a Q.921 interface protocol), routing and translation of signaling messages between theOTA manager 502 and the backhaul LAPD, and OAM&P support. - Various interfaces associated with the
base station 401 are shown diagrammatically in FIG. 5 as dotted lines, and include an over-the-air interface or “O-interface” 560 between the wirelessaccess communication unit 412 and thebase station 401, an internal interface or “I-interface” 561 between theOTA manager 502 and theline card manager 503, and a network interface or “N-interface” 562 between thebase station 401 and the network-side backhaul components (such as thebase station controller 112,MSC 116, andPSTN 125 shown in FIG. 1). Further information regarding these interfaces may be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,021,333, previously incorporated herein by reference, or in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/988,482, previously incorporated herein by reference. These interfaces are also shown at an abstract level in FIG. 10, described later herein. - In operation, the
base station 401 manages the radio resources for the wirelessaccess communication unit 412, and thereby provides support for the network side of the wireless trunk 108 (see FIG. 1). A wide variety of different communication schemes and radio resource protocols may be used. If, for example, thebase station 401 implements an IS-661 protocol for over-the-air communication, then thebase station 401 manages the resources necessary to support the wireless communication channels between the wirelessaccess communication unit 412 and thebase station 401, including time slots and spread spectrum codes. Thebase station 401 also provides multiplexing functions for the transfer of data to and from thebackhaul line 430 providing the connection to thePSTN 125. Thebase station 401 may, for example, multiplex data over a T1 (or fractional T1)backhaul line 430 to thebase station controller 112, which, as noted, pipes the data to and from thePSTN 125 via theMSC 116. - Protocol signaling over the N-
Interface 562, which connects the base station 401 (or 109 in FIG. 1) to the base station controller 112 (see FIG. 1), may be transported using the Q.921 LAPD protocol. Protocol signaling over the O-Interface 560, which connects thebase station 401 to the wirelessaccess communication unit 412, may be accomplished using over-the-air signaling messages (“O-Notes”) according to the IS-661 protocol. The O-Notes may be transmitted along with bearer data in IS-661 RF packets. Specific software functional components for each of theOTA manager 502 and theline card manager 503 are also depicted in FIG. 5. TheOTA manager 502 comprises asignal processing component 513 and anOTA datalink component 514 which handle the transfer of bearer data for theOTA manager 502. Thesignal processing component 513 andOTA datalink component 514 interact with an IS-661protocol component 512 which implements the IS-661 (or other suitable) over-the-air protocol and contains the protocol state machines for execution of the protocol on thebase station 401. Thesignal processing component 513 andOTA datalink component 514 thereby deliver bearer data and signaling information in IS-661packets 541. The IS-661protocol component 512 interfaces with anOAM&P component 510 and an I-interface router component 511, and provides any necessary translation of signaling to the IS-661 protocol. - The
line card manager 503 comprises asignal processing component 523 and abearer datalink component 524 which handle the transfer of bearer data for theline card manager 503. Thesignal processing component 523 and thebearer datalink component 524 delivers and receives bearer data 552 (in, e.g., an I.460 format) over aTi backhaul link 553, which comprises one or more of the T1 time slots available onbackhaul line 430. Theline card manager 503 also comprises aLAPD component 522 which delivers and receives signaling messages (e.g., N-Notes) over aLAPD signaling link 551. Across the N-interface 562, therefore, two separate information “pipes” are provided, one for signaling and one for bearer traffic, whereas across the O-interface 560 theOTA manager 502 multiplexes the signaling and bearer data onto the radio channels. TheLAPD component 522 interfaces with anOAM&P component 520 and an I-interface router component 521. The I-interface router component 521 of theline card manager 503 communicates with the I-interface router component 511 of theOTA manager 502, thereby allowing transfer of I-Notes between theline card manager 503 and theOTA manager 502. - The
base station 401 connects and manages radio and terrestrial bearer channels for call-related features, and supports system administration via OAM&P controlled by the system operator through the operations management center 120 (see FIG. 1). As part of its radio resource management functionality, thebase station 401 supports outgoing voice calls (normal and emergency) from the wirelessaccess communication unit 412. Incoming pages to the wirelessaccess communication unit 412 may optionally be supported by thebase station 401. Because the wirelessaccess communication unit 412 can be embodied as a stationary unit, handoff features otherwise necessary to support mobile user applications do not need to be utilized by thebase station 401 to support the wireless access communication unit. However, if thebase station 401 employs a protocol utilizing aspects of TDMA, thebase station 401 may be configured so as to support time slot interchange (TSI) whereby traffic in time slots experiencing unacceptable levels of interference are relocated to “quieter” time slots. In an analogous fashion, thebase station 401 can employ frequency interchange or code interchange, respectively, if aspects of FDMA or CDMA techniques are utilized for the over-the-air protocol. - Among its other radio resource management functions, the
base station 401 manages mapping of the radio channels (including the wireless communication channels of the wireless trunk 108) to the terrestrial (i.e., backhaul) channels. Thebase station 401 also provides, through its OAM&P functionality, support for administrative state changes, configuration, and provisioning of the radio resources. Thebase station 401 also provides fault management and alarm management for the radio resources, and sends fault or alarm signals to thebase station controller 112. In addition, thebase station 401 provides signaling flow control across the over-the-air interface, power control management for each radio channel. radio link recovery upon radio link interruption, and debug information logs to thebase station controller 112. As part of its power control management for the various radio channels, thebase station 401 may send performance metrics relating to the radio resources to thebase station controller 112 for analysis. - Subject to capacity and traffic constraints, the
base station 401 is generally capable of handling calls from more than one wirelessaccess communication unit 412, if multiple wirelessaccess communication units 412 are deployed within the service area of thebase station 401. The number of wirelessaccess communication units 412 depends upon the number of wireless channels available at thebase station 401 and the amount of traffic at the time call requests are made to thebase station 401. Thebase station 401 may, if desired, be configured so as to logically associate multiple wireless channels assigned to a particular wirelessaccess communication unit 412, so as to facilitate such things as de-registration, as further described herein. - With regard to terrestrial resource management, the
base station 401 manages and allocates the backhaul channels (such as TI time slots) over thebackhaul line 430. Thebase station 401 indicates backhaul channel allocation to thebase station controller 112 through signaling messages. In those embodiments in which the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is non-mobile, thebase station 401 need not support handoffs, and therefore need not support re-routing of backhaul channels to accommodate handoffs. TheOAM&P component 520 of thebase station 401 provides support for administrative state changes, configuration, and provisioning of terrestrial resources. It also provides support for performance metrics of the terrestrial resources, and sends the metrics to thebase station controller 112. TheOAM&P component 520 further provides fault management and alarm management for the terrestrial resources, which are also sent to thebase station controller 112. Thebase station 401 also provides slip management and recovery for T1 backhaul connections, bearer rate adaptation between the radio channels and the backhaul channels, and inband signaling within the bearer data frame to control thetranscoder unit 115. - In terms of call control support, the
base station 401 is involved in establishing, maintaining and tearing down outgoing voice calls received from the wirelessaccess communication unit 412. Preferred call flows pertaining to such functions are shown in, e.g., FIGS. 14 through 19, and described in more detail hereinafter. Thebase station 401 also relays DTMF signaling from the end user to thePSTN 125, if necessary, during an active telephone call. This signaling is relayed transparently through thebase station 401, and is supported by the I-interface and N-interface transport procedures. Thebase station 401 also provides digit analysis for outgoing telephone calls. - The
base station 401 also preferably provides security support in various manners. Thebase station 401 may, for example, provide support for bearer ciphering that occurs at thetranscoding unit 115 and the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Thebase station 401 may also support the GSM temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI) for protection of the user identity. - Referring again to FIG. 1, aspects of the
base station controller 112 will now be described. As shown in FIG. 1, thebase station 109 is connected to thebase station controller 112 over an interface such as an N-interface (such as the N-interface 562 described previously with respect to FIG. 5). Data (including signaling messages and bearer traffic) are passed between thebase station 109 and thebase station controller 112 across the N-interface. - A preferred
base station controller 112 may be viewed in one aspect as a base station subsystem controller that is used for managing one ormore base stations 109. A primary responsibility of thebase station controller 112 is to provide an interface between theMSC 116 and the radio access subsystem (i.e., the system components responsible for establishing and maintaining the physical radio channels). In a preferred embodiment, thebase station controller 112 incorporates aspects of the IS-661 communication protocol and the GSM communication protocol, thereby using what may be referred to as a “hybrid” protocol. Details of a preferred communication protocol may be found in, for example, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/988,482, previously incorporated herein by reference. In an alternative embodiments, thebase station controller 112 may be implemented using the IS-661 protocol in its entirety, or the GSM communication protocol in its entirety. - According to the IS-661 protocol, management of the radio resources resides in the
base station 109, with less of a role given to thebase station controller 112. In a GSM-type system, on the other hand, thebase station controller 112 plays a greater role in radio resource management, and may be viewed as essentially comprising a compact switch in charge of radio interface management. In the GSM system, thebase station controller 112 is configured with intelligence to enable it to instruct thebase station 109 and mobile stations (as well as the wireless access communication unit 106) when to allocate, handoff and release radio channels. The interface between thebase station 109 andbase station controller 112 in a GSM-type system is referred to as an Abis interface. - In a communication system using a “hybrid” protocol having aspects of both IS-661 and GSM protocols, the
base station controller 112 preferably performs a variety of resource management functions. As part of these functions, thebase station controller 112 switches bearer circuits and provision of bearer connectivity to form a path from thebase stations 109 to theMSC 116 for outgoing voice calls from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. In addition to switching bearer circuits, thebase station controller 112 provides signaling paths from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to theMSC 116 and other network elements. If required, thebase station controller 112 carries out the interworking between the BSSMAP radio resource management procedures on the GSM A-interface and the “N-Notes” radio resource management procedures on the N-interface. - The
base station controller 112 is involved in the allocation and release of radio channels. If the IS-661 protocol is used, then thebase station 109 is the entity that actually assigns and releases over-the-air resources. As part of call setup, however, thebase station controller 112 is the entity that coordinates this process. Thebase station controller 112 also controls the allocation and release of backhaul channels. If the IS-661 protocol is used, then thebase station 109 is the entity that actually assigns the bearer resources over the backhaul channels. However, as part of call setup, thebase station controller 112 coordinates this process as well. - The
base station controller 112 is also involved in ciphering of transmitted data. While the Transcoding unit 115 (see FIG. 1) is preferably the network end-point for bearer ciphering, thebase station controller 112 sets up and coordinates ciphering of bearer messages. - Certain mobility management procedures, such as authentication and identification, run end-to-end between the wireless
access communication unit 106 and theMSC 116, and are relayed through thebase station controller 112 with essentially no interworking requirements. For other mobility management functions, thebase station controller 112 performs interworking between the N-interface and A-interface procedures. For example, thebase station controller 112 may perform interworking between the N-interface and A-interface procedures for location updating or network-level registration (both normal and periodic, as further described herein), de-registration or IMSI detach, time slot interchange reallocation, and mobility management connection establishment. - Call control messages and procedures run end-to-end between the wireless
access communication unit 106 and theMSC 116, and are relayed transparently through thebase station controller 112. In one aspect, thebase station controller 112 provides a signaling path between the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and theMSC 116 to carry out call control signaling. - The
base station controller 112 may support a variety of interfaces. Thebase station controller 112 preferably supports the T-interface to thetranscoding unit 115 or, if the transcoding unit functionality is consolidated with thebase station controller 112, aGSM A-interface 571 between the consolidated base station controller/transcoding unit and theMSC 116. In the other direction, thebase station controller 112 also preferably supports the N-interface to thevarious base stations 109 to which it is connected. - In a preferred embodiment, the
base station controller 112 transmits and receives information to thetranscoding unit 115, shown in FIG. 1. Thetranscoding unit 115 in one aspect comprises a base station subsystem (BSS) entity located, in one embodiment, between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116. Preferably, thetranscoding unit 115 is under management control of thebase station controller 112, but is physically located on the premises of theMSC 116, thereby allowing thebase station controller 112 to be remotely located from the site of theMSC 116. Thetranscoding unit 115 comprises a number of transcoding unit shelves, operating independently of one another but under the control of thebase station controller 112. In a preferred embodiment, each transcoding unit shelf supports up to 92 bearer channels. - The
transcoding unit 115 generally provides the network side processing of key functions on the bearer path. This processing may include, for example, speech transcoding, network-side forward error correction (FEC), and network-side enciphering and deciphering of bearer voice. - With respect to the speech transcoding function, the
transcoding unit 115 preferably provides bidirectional conversion between encoded voice data received from the user side, and “mu-law” coded pulse-code modulated (PCM) data received from the network side at 64 kilobits per second. Thevocoder 206 in the wireless access communication unit 106 (see FIG. 2) compresses speech received from theCPE 105 for over-the-air transmission towards the network. In the reverse direction, thevocoder 206 in the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 de-compresses over-the-air speech prior to transmission to theCPE 105. - The
transcoding unit 115 preferably comprises, among other things, a speech encoder and speech decoder. The speech encoder in thetranscoding unit 115 receives PCM speech data from the network delivered at 64 kilobits per second, and compresses this data into a sub-rate over-the-air channel for transmission towards the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Forward error correction (FEC) information is added separately at thetranscoding unit 115 by the FEC function. The speech decoder in thetranscoding unit 115 processes compressed speech data from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, and transcodes this data to produce 64 kbit/s PCM speech data for transmission towards theMSC 116. The speech decoder in thetranscoding unit 115 additionally provides an interpolate function to output predicted speech patterns, in the event that thebase station 109 detects frames that contain errors that are not correctable by the forward error correction function. The speech decoder in thetranscoding unit 115 also provides a mute capability for silencing the output to the A-interface when necessary, such as during control traffic transmissions. - With regard to forward error correction (FEC), in the user-to-network direction the FEC information is added on to messages by the wireless
access communication unit 106. The channel decoding function in thebase station controller 112 and/ortranscoding unit 115 uses the FEC information to detect the presence of errors, and to estimate the most probable emitted bits given the received ones. In the network-to-user direction, thebase station controller 112 and/ortranscoding unit 115 applies forward error correction on the frames received from the vocoding function, before the frames are sent across the N-interface. The FEC decoding in the network-to-user direction is performed by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - With regard to encryption and decryption functions, a bearer encryption (or ciphering) mechanism utilized in the system is preferably based on the GSM A5/1 algorithm, which is an algorithm well known in the art. For bearer speech, the two endpoints in the system for encryption and decryption are the wireless
access communication unit 106 and thetranscoding unit 115. Where communication is divided into time frames and time slots (such as in certain types of time division multiple access or TDMA systems), encryption and decryption may be performed on a per-frame basis. - The wireless
access communication unit 106 and thetranscoding unit 115 preferably are “encryption synchronized” in the sense that the frame number used by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to encrypt a frame is the same as the frame number used by thetranscoding unit 115 to decrypt, and vice versa. The GSM A5/1 algorithm involves the generation of encryption/decryption masks on a per-frame basis, based on the frame number. - Typically, establishment or re-establishment of encryption synchronization occurs at call setup and when recovering from loss of encryption synchronization due to error conditions (whether experienced in the over-the-air link or the backhaul link). Once the encryption synchronization is established (or re-established, as the case may be), the wireless
access communication unit 106 and thetranscoding unit 115 increment the frame number for each frame cycle on the over-the-air and backhaul interfaces. Preferably, the same frame length (e.g., 20 milliseconds) is used for both the over-the-air and the backhaul time frames, so incrementing the frame number each frame cycle normally maintains frame number synchronization between the two endpoints of the encryption/decryption function. - The
transcoding unit 115 may support a variety of interfaces. Thetranscoding unit 115 may support the A-interface linking thetranscoding unit 115 at theMSC 116, and the T15 interface linking thetranscoding unit 115 to thebase station controller 112. The T-interface carries bearer voice data that is processed by the transcoding unit bearer functions and relayed on the A-interface to theMSC 116, as well as A-interface signaling over SS7 links. Preferably, thetranscoding unit 115 provides transparent pass-through of signaling between thebase station controller 112 andMSC 116 over SS7 links and, optionally, X.25 or similar type links. The T-interface also carries signaling for OAM&P control of thetranscoding unit 115, and inband signaling between thetranscoding unit 115 and thebase station controller 112 for dynamic per-call control of the transcoding unit functions. Signaling exchanged between thetranscoding unit 115 and thebase station controller 112 is concentrated in a specific time slot (e.g., the first time slot of a time frame), and controlled through the level-2 link-access procedures for the D-channel (LAPD) protocol. - FIG. 9 is a high level diagram illustrating a preferred breakdown of bearer path functions performed at the wireless
access communication unit 106, thebase station 109, and thebase station controller 112 and/ortranscoding unit 115. As shown in FIG. 9, the wireless access communication unit bearer path functions 901 include voice encoding anddecoding 911, forward error correction (FEC) 912, encryption anddecryption 913, andtone generation 914. The base station bearer path functions 902 include backhaul framing and channel multiplexing and demultiplexing. The base station controller and transcoding unit bearer path functions 903 comprise voice encoding and decoding, forward error correction (FEC), encryption and decryption, backhaul framing, and channel multiplexing and demultiplexing. These functions have been mentioned previously in relation to the various components of the system, and are further described in various levels of detail elsewhere herein or in materials incorporated by reference herein. - As shown in FIG. 9, the speech encoding/decoding, encryption/decryption and FEC functions performed in the wireless
access communication unit 106 are mirrored in the basedstation controller 112 and/ortranscoding unit 115. The channel multiplexing/de-multiplexing and backhaul framing functions performed in thebase station 109 are also mirrored by thebase station controller 112 and/ortranscoding unit 115. - Referring again to FIG. 1, the
transcoding unit 115 is connected to the mobile switching center (MSC) 116, which is connected to thePSTN 125. TheMSC 116 is a cellular switch that acts as an interface between the base station subsystem (BSS) and thePSTN 125, and acts as the gateway to the long-distance network. TheMSC 116 has telephone exchange capabilities including call setup, routing selection, switching between incoming and outgoing channels, control of communications, and release of connections. In addition, theMSC 116 performs its functions while taking into account mobility management aspects of the subscriber, including authentication, ciphering, radio resource management, and location register updating procedures. TheMSC 116 also allows the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 interworking to thePSTN 125. TheMSC 116 may be part of a digital multiplex system (DMS) “super-node” based switching system, capable of providing the switching functions in a cellular network. Also, the visitor location register (VLR) is preferably co-located and integrated with theMSC 116. - The
MSC 116 may support a variety of interfaces. TheMSC 116 may support an A-interface providing linkage between theMSC 116 and the base station subsystem (BSS). particularly thebase station controller 112 and thetranscoding unit 115, and a PSTN interface which is used for connecting theMSC 116 to thePSTN 125 across which voice and circuit traffic is transmitted. TheMSC 116 also may support a mobile application part (MAP) interface, which is a CCS7 application permitting mobility information to be transferred among network level components. In addition, theMSC 116 may support a billing center interface, which is used for connecting theMSC 116 to a downstream processor for downloading of billing events; an operations management center (OMC) interface, which is used to administer theMSC 116 and visitor location register (VLR), and a service center interface, which is used for connecting the service center function responsible for relaying and store-and-forwarding short messages to mobile stations. - A variety of functions are preferably performed by the
MSC 116. For example, theMSC 116 preferably authenticates subscribers and, if accessible to the system, mobile stations. TheMSC 116 interfaces to thePSTN 125, and may interface to, for instance, public land mobile networks (PLMNs) or PCS-1900 networks. TheMSC 116 also provides terrestrial channel allocation, and call control and signaling support. In addition, theMSC 116 may perform echo cancellation towards thePSTN 125, handling and management of database information, charge recording, handling of subscriber registration and location management, and operation measurements. - The
MSC 116 is connected to a home location register (HLR) and authentication center (AuC), collectively shown as an integrated unit HLR/AuC 123 in FIG. 1. The HLR/AuC 123 may be built on a digital (e.g., DMS) super-node platform, and interconnect with various functional entities including the visitor location register, MSC, and mobile application part (MAP). The HLR component of the HLR/AuC 123 contains information about subscribers, services assigned to the subscribers, the status of such services, and any further information required to support the operation of the services when active. The HLR responds to requests from theMSC 116 and/or VLR to provide or update subscriber data. The HLR communicates with the VLR to download subscriber data and to obtain call routine information for the mobile stations in the region covered by the VLR. - The AuC component of the HLR/
AuC 123 contains subscriber keys for use in authenticating attempts to access the network. The AuC component uses subscriber keys to generate authentication vectors, which are provided to the VLR via the HLR component. Further details regarding authentication, as noted, may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/988,505, previously incorporated herein by reference. - In a mobile system, such as a PCS 1900 mobile system, the information held by the HLR component of the HLR/
AuC 123 allows mobile stations to be addressed by means of a unique number, regardless of geographic location, thus allowing mobile stations to roam freely within and between networks. In a system providing fixed access wireless services in which a wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and related components are utilized, the HLR component contains information similar to that maintained for mobile stations in a completely mobile-based system. The HLR component of the HLR/AuC 123 contains information regarding the subscribers interfacing with the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. As noted previously, the individual CPE trunks connected to the wireless access communication unit 106 (such asCPE trunks 602 shown in FIG. 6) may appear as individual subscribers (i.e., “mobile stations”) to the HLR and VLR. Hence, each CPE trunk connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 has its own (preferably unique) subscriber identity number. The subscriber identity number may, as noted previously, comprise an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), which is a unique, permanent identifier of a CPE trunk assigned at the time of manufacture of theCPE 105, or may comprise a mobile subscriber ISDN (MSISDN) number, which would be one of the public PSTN numbers assigned to theCPE 105. - Because the wireless network is likely to be configured to service individual mobile subscribers as well as being capable of servicing the wireless
access communication unit 106, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may include functionality for keeping its non-mobile aspects transparent from the wireless network. For example, a mobile telephone subscriber may occasionally signal the wireless network to refresh the VLR on a regular basis. To keep the fixed wireless aspects of the system transparent to the wireless network, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may periodically perform network-level registration using, for example, a GSM periodic registration mechanism, to keep the VLR entries for the “subscribers” alive. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may also perform network-level registration every time it registers through abase station 109 in a location area different from that of thebase station 109 to which it was previously connected. Further details regarding initial and periodic registration may be found in, e.g., U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/987,872, previously incorporated herein by reference. - Certain features relating to voice call establishment and maintenance will now be described in more detail, with reference to the interaction among various components of a communication system in which the wireless
access communication unit 106 is deployed. - For “outgoing” voice call establishment initiated by the
CPE 105, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 handles acquisition of an over-the-air communication channel, mobility management connectivity, and call setup, and in addition is preferably capable of handling various error or exception conditions. When the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects a trunk seizure by theCPE 105, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 marks the CPE trunk as “busy” and issues a dial tone (assuming that it is able to communicate with a base station 109). In parallel, the wireless access communication unit initiates an over-the-air communication channel acquisition procedure. The dial tone is removed when the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects the first dialed digit from theCPE 105, or if it detects an on-hook from theCPE 105 prior to receiving any digits therefrom. - To facilitate initial acquisition of over-the-air communication channels, upon initial power-up the wireless
access communication unit 106 preferably performs a thorough search ofnearby base stations 109 to find asuitable base station 109. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 establishes communication with thebase station 109, and receives a surrounding base station map from thecurrent base station 109. The surrounding base station map provides the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 with a list of neighboringbase stations 109 that are candidates for over-the-air communication. Using the surrounding base station map, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 builds up a base station selection table containing such things as signal quality information on the neighboringbase stations 109. The base station selection table is stored in non-volatile memory in the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. On subsequent power-ons, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 uses the existing base station selection table to speed up its base station acquisition. - On receiving a trigger from the
CPE 105 to set up an outgoing call or perform a registration, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 attempts to acquire an over-the-air communication channel. In certain wireless systems the acquisition of an over-the-air communication channel is accomplished by interacting with a control channel of the wireless system. In certain types of TDMA systems, the channel acquisition process may entail acquiring a time slot in a time frame established by thebase station 109. Acquisition of a time slot may be carried out, for example, according to a handshake protocol described in more detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,455,822, assigned to the assignee of the present invention, and hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. - If the wireless
access communication unit 106 is unable to find an available over-the-air communication channel for communication with thebase station 109, its next action depends on whether or not there are other calls active or being set up through the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. If there are no other calls active or being set up through the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, then the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 searches the surrounding area to find abase station 109 with which it can communicate. If asuitable base station 109 is found (based upon, for example, received signal quality and traffic availability), the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 attempts to acquire an over the-air communication channel on thenew base station 109. (For example, in one particular embodiment, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may look for a general polling message sent within a time slot, wherein the general polling message indicates the availability of an over-the-air time slot for communication, as generally described in the above-referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,455,822.) If the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 fails to acquire an over-the-air communication channel, it may try again, or else search for adifferent base station 109. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 continues with this process until it either acquires an over-the-air communication channel, or else a link establishment timeout period expires, indicating a failed attempt. - If there are other calls active or being set up through the wireless
access communication unit 106 when a failed attempt to acquire another over-the-air communication channel with thecurrent base station 109 occurs, then the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 marks the channel acquisition attempt as failed. Alternatively, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may attempt to set up the call with adifferent base station 109, and thereby attempt maintain communication with two different base stations 109 (the one handling the currently active calls and the one handling the newest call) simultaneously. - If the over-the-air communication channel acquisition attempt has failed, the wireless
access communication unit 106 issues a “reorder” tone on the CPE trunk, and marks the over-the-air link status as congested. If the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 has a ground-start trunk interface with theCPE 105, then the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 busies its idle CPE trunks by seizing them (i.e., applying tip to ground on each CPE trunk). So long as the congested condition is in effect, theCPE 105 attempts to route the calls that would otherwise be directed to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to the PSTN 125 (assuming that theCPE 105 has call routing capability). While in the “congested” state, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 continues to track the over-the-air channel availability on thecurrent base station 109. Should the congested condition clear (e.g., it is able to see general polling messages from thebase station 109, or otherwise receive information from thebase station 109 indicating available communication channels), the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then marks the over-the-air link status as “uncongested.” If the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 has a ground-start trunk interface with theCPE 105, then the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 un-busies any CPE trunks by releasing them (i.e., removing tip from ground). - If acquisition of an over-the-air communication channel is successful, then the wireless
access communication unit 106 proceeds with digit transmission and analysis. On detecting the first dialed digit, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 removes the dial tone and initiates a digit analysis procedure. In a preferred embodiment, digits are relayed from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 as they are received after the over-the-air communication channel has been established, and digit analysis is performed at thebase 10,station 109. Thebase station 109 stores the digits and analyzes them, determining the type of call and the end of the dialing sequence. - In an illustrative embodiment, the
base station 109 analyzes the digits as follows. If thebase station 109 detects the digit pattern “X11,” where “X” is a “4” or a “9”, it will consider dialing to be complete. If the digit sequence is “911,” thebase station 109 marks the call type as an emergency call. Any other type of call is marked as a normal call. If the first three digits are not “411” or “911,” then thebase station 109 continues to receive digits, and uses a dialing-complete timeout period (of, e.g., four seconds) to detect the end of dialing. To implement the dialing-complete timeout period, a dialing timer is activated when the first digit is received by thebase station 109, and is reset each time a new digit is received. When the dialing timer expires, thebase station 109 considers dialing to be complete. - On determining that the dialing sequence is complete, the
base station 109 issues a trigger to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to continue with call establishment, including mobility management connection establishment and call setup. This trigger also indicates the type of call (i.e., normal versus emergency). - Several types of exceptions or errors may occur in the attempt to establish a communication path from the user (i.e., telephone station102) to the
base station 109. For example, if the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is unable to communicate with thebase station 109, then the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 will not generate a dial tone. Instead, it will issue a reorder tone to the user via theCPE 105. If no digit is received by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 for a predetermined timeout period (e.g., 16 seconds) after the trunk seizure is recognized by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, then it applies permanent signal treatment on the trunk (i.e., treats it as an extended off-hook situation), as further described below. If the dialing from the user is incomplete, or if the dialed number is invalid, then theMSC 116 takes appropriate action. In such situations, thebase station 109 generally detects end-of-dialing and triggers the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to set up the call. The incomplete or invalid digit sequence is then filled into a DTAP Setup message by thebase station 109 and sent to theMSC 116. The digit analysis performed at theMSC 116 detects the exception condition, causing theMSC 116 to return a DTAP Release Complete message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, indicating that the dialed number is invalid. - If the wireless
access communication unit 106 should lose communication with itscurrent base station 109, or if the quality of one or more over-the-air communication links has dropped below an acceptable minimum (based on, e.g., high bit error rate, low signal strength, and the like), the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 starts a base station acquisition procedure to locate abase station 109 that it can communicate with satisfactorily. - For a ground-start trunk interface between the wireless
access communication unit 106 and theCPE 105, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 “busies” its CPE trunks by seizing them, i.e., by applying tip to ground on eachCPE trunk 602. On completing base station re-acquisition (either by re-establishing communication with thecurrent base station 109 or finding a strong enough RF link with a different base station), the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 un-busies each of the CPE trunks that were busied out when communication with thebase station 109 was lost or interrupted. - In another aspect of the invention, each CPE trunk supported by the wireless
access communication unit 106 represents a logical subscriber to the network, even though the multiple CPE trunks are physically connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Thus, for example, where fourCPE trunks 602 are connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, four unique subscriber identifiers are allocated. The use of different logical subscriber identifiers for eachCPE trunk 602 permits multiple calls to be handled by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 across one or more wireless links to thebase station 109. In a particular embodiment, eachCPE trunk 602 is identified with its own unique international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) number and mobile station ISDN (MSISDN) number for addressing. When the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 initiates “mobility management” and call control procedures on behalf of one of the connected CPE trunks, it uses the IMSI assigned to that CPE trunk. - To the network side of the system (i.e., the
base station 109,base station controller 112,MSC 116, etc.), each logical subscriber associated with the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is seen as a separate user, much like the separate mobile subscribers that can also communicate wirelessly with thebase station 109. Thebase station 109 generally need not know that a group of different IMSIs belongs to a single entity (i.e., the wireless access communication unit 106). The IMSIs are preferably held on one or more subscriber interface module (SIM) 606 chips, programmed at the factory. EachSIM 606 chip, once placed in the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, belongs to a specific CPE trunk. The IMSI is used, as described elsewhere herein, for such things as registration, authentication, and network access. - For each IMSI stored in the wireless
access communication unit 106 there preferably is a corresponding MSISDN stored in the HLR component of the HLR/AuC 123. The MSISDN number may be the equivalent of the NANP number converted into an MSISDN number—i.e., a number in the format of 1+NPA+NXX+XXXX. The MSISDN number is used for such things as call origination and billing generation. The MSISDN number may be one of the public PSTN numbers assigned to theCPE 105; therefore, the MSISDN number may be assigned to theCPE 105 from thePSTN 125. - The wireless
access communication unit 106 may be assigned an identifying serial number in the form of an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number. The IMEI number may be assigned at the factory, and each wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is preferably associated with a unique IMEI number. If an Equipment Identity Register (EIR) element is used within the network, it will contain the IMEI number of each wirelessaccess communication unit 106 in the system. Alarms generated by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may use the IMEI number for identification purposes. - As previously mentioned herein, the invention provides in one aspect signaling techniques and protocols for facilitating communication in a system having a wireless trunk. Signaling information is transported across one or more of the various interfaces of the
communication system 101, so as to allow communication between theCPE 105 and thePSTN 125 to take place utilizing the capabilities of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. In a preferred embodiment, thecommunication system 101 incorporates aspects of the IS-661 communication protocol (or a modified version of the IS-661 protocol) and the GSM communication protocol, thereby employing a “hybrid” protocol. - Various aspects of the IS-661 protocol may be summarized as follows. According to the IS-661 protocol, over-the-air communication between a
base station 109 and mobile stations or other user stations is carried out using frequency division duplexing (FDD) wherein thebase station 109 transmits over a base station frequency band, and the mobile stations or other user stations transmit over a mobile/user station frequency band. Transmissions are distinguished according to time slots, with a TDMA time frame on each of the base station frequency band and mobile/user station frequency band comprising 32 time slots each 625 microseconds in length, resulting in a TDMA time frame duration of 20 milliseconds. (In some variations, however, only 16 duplex time slots are used.) A preferred frequency of operation is 1850 to 1990 MHz, with a synthesizer tuning step size of 100 kHz. Communication is carried out using spread spectrum communication, with a 1.6 MHz RF channel spacing. Spread spectrum modulation may be MSK or OQPSK with pulse shaping implemented using a root raised cosine method. The spread spectrum chipping rate is preferably 1.25 Megachips (Mcps) on each of two channels, an I channel and a Q channel. - The system may provide for antenna diversity, and may also provide for power control of the mobile stations or other user stations in predefined steps (of e.g. 3 dB).
- Further details regarding the particulars of the IS-661 protocol utilized in a preferred embodiment are described elsewhere herein, or may found in the OMNI_Notes_RMT Protocols Rev. 02.03D filed as Technical Appendix A herewith.
- The different interfaces of the communication system may employ different protocols depending in part upon where in the chain of the communication path the interface appears. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing interfaces between different components of a
communication system 801 according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. Some of these interfaces have also been generally described previously with respect to the preferredbase station 501 shown in FIG. 5. The different interfaces shown in FIG. 10 include an over-the-air interface or “O-interface” 560 between a wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and thebase station 109, an internal interface or “I-interface” 561 internal to the base station 109 (i.e., between theOTA manager 502 and theline card manager 503 of the preferredbase station 501, as shown in FIG. 5), and a network interface or “N-interface” 562 between thebase station 109 and thebase station controller 112. Thebase station controller 112 communicates with theMSC 116 over a standard interface such as theGSM A-interface 571. - In a preferred embodiment, in accordance with the embodiment of the invention shown in FIG. 1, a
transcoding unit 115 is interposed between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116. In this embodiment, an additional interface designated the “T-interface” is provided between thebase station controller 112 and thetranscoding unit 115, and thetranscoding unit 115 communicates with theMSC 116 over a standard interface such as the GSM A-interface. - Each of the communication interfaces shown in FIG. 10 will now be described in more detail, starting with the “O-interface”560 between the wireless
access communication unit 106 and thebase station 109. The “O-interface” 560 comprises one or more wireless, over the-air communication channels, each channel preferably (but not necessarily) including a forward communication link and a reverse communication link to support full duplex communication. The over-the-air communication channel(s) of the O-interface 560 may be implemented according to any of a variety of different multiple-access communication protocols, including protocols utilizing time division multiple access (TDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA), or code division multiple access (CDMA), or various combinations thereof. The O-interface 560 may include, in some alternative embodiments. wireless broadcast channels from thebase station 109 that are used, for example, for transmitting control traffic and signaling information. In other embodiments dedicated broadcast control channels are not used. - In a preferred embodiment, the
base station 109 is part of a cellular network that employs aspects of FDMA, TDMA and CDMA for cell isolation. In an exemplary embodiment, users are isolated, and multiple access is achieved, through TDMA. Frequency division duplexing (FDD) is utilized to permit 16 full duplex users to share a common RF radio frequency. Adjacent cells in the cellular network are assigned one of nine frequency channels and use a code reuse pattern of seven to achieve isolation between the cells. Direct sequence spread spectrum transmissions are used by thebase stations 109 and the users within a cell, including the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Spread spectrum communication reduces interference between cells as well as with respect to other systems (e.g., PCS systems) operating within the same proximity. Cells in adjacent clusters use a variety of interference rejection techniques, including orthogonal or near orthogonal spreading codes, transmit power control, directional antennas and time slot interchange (TSI). - One possible communication protocol that may be used for communicating across the O-
interface 560 in one embodiment of the present invention is depicted in FIG. 25. The protocol depicted in FIG. 25 makes use of time division multiple access (TDMA) and spread spectrum techniques. As shown in FIG. 25, a polling loop 1380 (“major frame”) comprises a plurality of time slots 1381 (“minor frames”). Eachminor frame 1381 comprises communication between a base station 109 (e.g., cellular station) and a user station (e.g., mobile user) in time division duplex—that is, the base station transmits to a user station and the user station transmits back to thebase station 109 within the sameminor frame 1381. - More specifically, as shown in an exploded view of a portion of the
polling loop 1380 in FIG. 25, aminor frame 1381 comprises a mobile oruser transmission 1382 preceding abase transmission 1383. Theminor frame 1381 also comprises a variableradio delay gap 1384 preceding theuser transmission 1382, followed by a turn-aroundgap 1388 and aguard time gap 1389. Aftergap 1389 is thebase transmission 1383, which is followed by another turn-aroundgap 1393. Theuser transmission 1382 comprises apreamble 1385, apreamble sounding gap 1386, and auser message interval 1387. The base transmission comprises apreamble 1390, apreamble sounding gap 1391, and abase message interval 1392. - Another communication protocol that may be used for communication across the O-
interface 560 is depicted in FIG. 26. The protocol depicted in FIG. 26 uses aspects of both FDMA (in the sense that transmissions are distinguished by different frequency allocations) and TDMA (in the sense that transmissions are distinguished by separate time allocations). As shown in FIG. 26, onefrequency band 1510 is allocated to abase station 109 for base-to-user transmissions, and anotherfrequency band 1511 is allocated to user stations (e.g., handsets, or other wireless units) for user-to-base transmissions. A repeating major time frame (or “polling loop”) 1501 is defined for communication over eachfrequency band base time slots 1502 and user time slots 1503 are defined within the repeatingmajor time frame 1501, with the user time slots 1503 preferably lagging behind thebase time slots 1502 by an amount of time. In a preferred embodiment, in which sixteenbase time slots 1502 and sixteen user time slots 1503 are defined in eachmajor time frame 1501, thetime lag 1505 between the firstbase time slot 1502 and first user time slot 1503 is a preset amount of time corresponding to a number of time slots, such as eight time slots, and is therefore referred to as a “slot offset.” This time lag or slot offset 1505 allows user stations time to receive transmissions over thebase frequency band 1510 in the assignedbase time slot 1502, process the base-to-user transmissions, perform a transmit/receive frequency switch, and transmit a reverse link transmission in the corresponding user time slot 1503, without having to wait an entire time frame duration to transmit a reverse link transmission. The slot offset 1505 can comprise an amount of time other than eight time slots, or themajor time frame 1501 can be defined such that there is no slot offset 1505 at all. - Alternatively, instead of having a fixed time lag or slot offset1505,
base time slots 1502 and user time slots 1503 can be assigned independently, with the spacing between abase time slot 1502 and a corresponding user time slot 1503 (i.e., a duplex pairing) being selected dynamically based upon, for example, the type of user. - In a preferred embodiment, the user time slot(s)1503 and base time slot(s) 1502 assigned to the wireless
access communication unit 106 are offset by an amount of time sufficient to allow transmit/receive frequency switching of the radio transceiver at the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. In one embodiment, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 requires approximately 625 microseconds to perform a transmit/receive frequency switch. which corresponds to half of a time slot duration if thetime slots 1502, 1503 are each 1.35 milliseconds in length. An offset of eight slots between thebase time slot 1502 and corresponding user time slot 1503 so as to form a “virtual” time slot is presently preferred. A slot offset of eight is deemed, within the context of the preferred embodiment, sufficient to accommodate four trunks per wirelessaccess communication unit 106 in the available over-the-air slot space, while reducing the potential number of transmit/receive frequency switches by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - In accordance with one embodiment, the wireless
access communication unit 106 transmits to thebase station 109, at the time of negotiating a slot allocation with thebase station 109, a slot assignment map indicating which over-the-air slots are already assigned to calls on the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Thebase station 109 uses the slot assignment map information to pick abase time slot 1502 and user time slot 1503 from the pool ofavailable time slots 1502, 1503. Thebase station 109 makes this selection based upon, for example, transmit/receive switching time constraints of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - In one aspect of a preferred communication protocol, a single
base time slot 1502 and a single user time slot 1503 collectively comprise a duplex communication channel. In a preferred embodiment, thetime frame 1501 of the protocol described with reference to FIG. 26 supports sixteenbase time slots 1502 and sixteen corresponding user time slots 1503, for a total of sixteen possible duplex communication channels. In a preferred embodiment, eachbase time slot 1502 and user time slot 1503 is 1.35 milliseconds in duration, and each time slot permits 9.6 kilobits/second for the transmission of encoded speech or other data. - The number of wireless
access communication units 106 supportable by asingle base station 109 is generally a function of the number of communication channels available at thebase station 109 and the number of communication channels (i.e., CPE trunks) required by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. For example, where sixteen communication channels are available at thebase station 109, and where each wirelessaccess communication unit 106 has fourCPE trunks 602, thebase station 109 can support four wirelessaccess communication units 106, each operating at maximum capacity, at a given time. However. where it is expected that the wirelessaccess communication units 106 will operate at less than maximum capacity for periods of time, and based on blocking requirements and expected subscriber loads, more than four wirelessaccess communication units 106 could be assigned to asingle base station 109, with the wirelessaccess communication units 106 using thebase station 109 as a shared resource. In addition, thebase station 109 may communicate with other wireless users, such as mobile handsets or other wireless devices, simultaneously with its communication with one or more wirelessaccess communication units 106. - Communication channels are preferably assigned to the wireless
access communication unit 106 on a demand basis, although they may, in certain embodiments, be pre-allocated as well. An advantage of dynamic assignment of over-the-air communication channels is that more users can be supported. For the protocol shown in FIG. 26, over-the-air communication channels are preferably assigned based on requests from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to thebase station 109. The assignment of over-the-air communication channels is carried out in the same fashion for mobile users (if any) that also communicate with thebase station 109—i.e., according to the cellular communication protocol for the network of which thebase station 109 is a part. For example, over-the-air communication channels may be assigned with the assistance of a dedicated control channel. Over-the-air communication channels may also be assigned according to techniques similar to those described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,689,502, hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. Any other suitable mechanism for allocating or assigning over-the-air communication channels may also be used. - While the O-
interface 560 generally involves the direct wireless interface between the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and thebase station 109, several other interfaces, as depicted in more detail in FIG. 10, are involved in exchanging information with thePSTN 125. The next interface in progression towards thePSTN 125 is the I-interface 561. The I-interface 561 is internal to thebase station 109, and generally provides for, among other things, the translation of the radio messages to a format suitable for backhaul transmission to the network, and vice versa. Details of a preferred I-interface 561 may be found in, e.g. U.S. Pat. No. 6,094,575, hereby incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein. Further details of the I-interface 561 are also discussed herein with respect to FIG. 5. - The next interface in the progression from the wireless
access communication unit 106 towards thePSTN 125, as shown in FIG. 10, is the N-interface 562, which connects thebase station 109 to thebase station controller 112. The N-interface 562 comprises both traffic and signaling communication channels, as described further herein. At the physical layer, the N-interface 562 uses a fractional T1 service as the transport mechanism. Each fractional T1 link supports transfer rates from 64 kilobits/second up to 1.536 megabits/second. Each time slot on the T1 link supports up to four 16 kilobit/second bearer channels. - The traffic channels of the N-
interface 562 include non-aggregated 16 kilobit/second channels for carrying data (e.g., speech data) for one radio traffic channel (i.e., one over-the-air communication channel). Up to four such traffic channels can be multiplexed into one 64 kilobits/second T1 time slot. A single signaling channel is provided for eachbase station 109 for carrying signaling and OAM&P information, at a rate of 64 kilobits/second. The signaling traffic includes control information pertaining to the link between thebase station 109 and thebase station controller 112, as well as signaling traffic relayed between the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and theMSC 116. - To manage signaling and operations or administrative messaging over the N-
interface 562, LAPD terminal endpoint identifiers (TEIs) are used for the transfer of signaling and OAM&P information between thebase station controller 112 and abase station 109, as well as control information between a local management terminal (if provided) and thebase station 109. TEIs are preferably assigned to the base common function (see FIG. 7, described below) and the transceivers which transmit and receive messages over the N-interface 562. A base common function TEI is permanently assigned to a T1 time slot on the N-interface 562, and is derived from the T1 time slot number. Transceiver TEIs are semi-permanent and are established from configuration parameters. Different functional entities within the base common function and the backhaul transceivers are addressed using service access point identifiers (SAPIs). In a particular embodiment, a single backhaul transceiver is supported by thebase station 109, and hence in such an embodiment only one transceiver TEI is used. - FIG. 7 shows in more detail the interface signaling structures for the N-
interface 562 used in conjunction with a preferred embodiment of the invention. As shown in FIG. 7, a base station controller (BSC) 702 is connected to a base station (OBTS) 703 over a plurality oflogical links 711 through 715, all of which are, from a physical standpoint, multiplexed onto a single digital timeslot channel (or DSO) and transmitted using pulse code modulation (PCM). Thebase station 703 shown in FIG. 7 comprises twotransceivers 706, 707 (designated “TRX1” and TRX2,” respectively), which are identified by terminal endpoint identifiers TEI B and TEI C, respectively, and a base common function (BCF) 705, which is identified by terminal endpoint identifier TEI A. -
Logical links 711 through 715 may be categorized according to service access provider identifier (SAPI) type. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, a SAPI type of “62” indicates OAM&P signaling, while a SAPI type of “0” indicates traffic signaling. As illustrated by the interface signaling structure shown in FIG. 7, one OAM&P SAPIlogical link 712 and one traffic signalinglogical link 713 are logically associated with onetransceiver 706, and another OAM&P SAPIlogical link 714 and traffic signalinglogical link 715 are associated with theother transceiver 707. A third OAM&Plogical link 711 is logically associated with the basecommon function 705. - Signaling messages for traffic control are transmitted on two of the
logical links transceivers logical links base station 703 andbase station controller 702 relate to functions such as, for example, backhaul and radio resource management, and mobility management. Signaling messages carried bychannels access communication unit 106 and theMSC 116, and are encapsulated within transport notes. - In addition, observation counters and operation measurements sent by the
base station 703 to thebase station controller 702, and encapsulated within transport notes, can be conveyed acrosslogical links - Messaging related to management functions (such as OAM&P) is carried on
logical links common function 705 andtransceivers base station 703 by thebase station controller 703. - In a preferred embodiment, the
base station controller 112 is connected to atranscoding unit 115 over an T-interface, which is shown in FIG. 1 but not explicitly shown in FIG. 10. The T-interface links thebase station controller 112 to thetranscoding unit 115 over a T1 connection, which carries a variety of different links, including bearer voice channel links and signaling links. The T-interface carries a plurality of 16 kilobits/second bearer voice channels containing coded, encrypted voice and FEC information, along with inband signaling information between thebase station 109 and the transcoding unit 115 (i.e., the endpoints of the encryption/decryption algorithms). In one embodiment, up to four such bearer voice channels can be multiplexed onto one DSO timeslot. The bearer voice channels are processed for transcoding and rate adaptation functionality by thetranscoding unit 115, which formats the bearer voice channel data into 64 kilobits/second pulse-code modulated (PCM) voice data for relay to theMSC 116. - In addition to bearer data, the T-interface also carries one or more signaling links. For example, the T-interface carries signaling links for OAM&P control of the
transcoding unit 115 by thebase station controller 112, using a standard LAPD data link. The T-interface also carries SS7 signaling links between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116, each using one TI DS0 timeslot. The signaling information on these links is relayed transparently between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116 through thetranscoding unit 115. The T-interface may also optionally carry the communication link between thebase station 109 and the operations management center (OMC) 120. - The transcoding unit115 (if provided) is connected to the
MSC 116 over a standard interface, such as the GSM A-interface. Alternatively, the functionality of thetranscoding unit 115 may be incorporated in thebase station controller 112, which then would connect to theMSC 116 over a standard interface such as the GSM A-interface. The A-interface is depicted in FIG. 1, and is also denoted in FIG. 7 byreference numeral 571. Details of the GSM A-interface are described in, for example, “Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to Base Station Subsystem (BSS) Interface;Layer 3 Specification,” GSM Recommendation 08.08. Preferably, some modifications are made to the standard GSM A-interface to support the features and functionality of the preferred embodiment or embodiments described herein. Such modifications may include, for example, using a T1 line as the physical interface to carry both traffic and signaling, and using μ-law coding in certain geographical regions (such as North America). - Signaling links for the A-interface, in general, logically run between the
base station controller 112 and theMSC 116, whereas the bearer links span between thetranscoding unit 115 and theMSC 116. Thetranscoding unit 115, as noted, processes the 16 kilobits/second bearer links received over the T-interface, and generates 64 kilobits/second pulse-code modulation links towards theMSC 116. The A-interface signaling channels carry signaling connection control part (SCCP) logical signaling links. An SCCP link is maintained between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116 for each active CPE trunk (or “logical mobile station”) of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 that is communicating with thePSTN 125. Signaling information carried over the A-interface includes SS7 signaling between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116 for management of the link, A-interface radio resource management signaling, A-interface mobility management signaling. call control signaling between the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and theMSC 116 relayed through thebase station controller 112, and, optionally, OAM&P signaling between thebase station controller 112 and theOMC 120. The A-interface signaling traffic passes through the transcoding unit 115 (if provided), and thetranscoding unit 115, as noted, relays the signaling information transparently between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116. - As noted previously herein, both GSM and non-GSM aspects of signaling are utilized in a
preferred communication system 101 in accordance with the present invention. In a preferred embodiment, aspects of GSM signaling and messaging are used within thecommunication system 101 such that the interworkings of the physical protocol are essentially transparent at the network level. In this embodiment, a non-GSM physical layer is employed. while communication with theMSC 116 is packaged using a GSM signaling format so that the non-GSM aspects of the wireless system are transparent to the network. Details of the various interfaces used in a preferred system have been described above, while details of signaling and protocols carried out within thecommunication system 101 are described in more detail below. While the signaling and protocols are described with reference to the specific interfaces shown in FIGS. 1, 7, and 10, aspects of the signaling and protocols may also be employed using other interface configurations as well. - FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a protocol architecture for one particular embodiment of the
preferred communication system 101, and further depicts a preferred relationship of connections among the wirelessaccess communication unit 106,base station 109,base station controller 112, andMSC 116 across the O-interface 560, N-interface 562 andA-interface 571. In the protocol architecture shown in FIG. 8, “CM” relates to connection management, “MM” relates to mobility management, “OTA” relates to the over-the-air protocol “LAPD” relates to link access protocol for the D channel, “IWF” relates to an interworking function. “Ph L” relates to the physical layer, “BSSMAP” relates to the base station subsystem management application part, “SCCP” relates to SS7 signaling connection control part. “MTP” relates to message transfer part (MTP Layers 2 and 3), “OAM” relates to operations, maintenance and administration, “NTS-MM” relates to N-Notes mobility management, and “NTS-RR” relates to N-Notes radio resource management. - For most of the physical radio functions, a preferred embodiment of the communication system utilizes the protocol architecture for the IS-661 mobility system. For higher level functionality, a preferred embodiment of the communication system uses aspects of GSM, as described in more detail hereinafter.
- The call control protocol is the GSM direction transfer application part (DTAP) call control entity, shown as the GSM-CM layer in FIG. 8. This GSM DTAP call control entity (i.e., GSM-CM layer) supports a variety of features, including (1) the establishment, maintenance and release of normal outgoing voice calls (i.e., originating from the CPE105) between the wireless
access communication unit 106 and theMSC 116; (2) the establishment, maintenance and release of emergency (i.e., “911”) outgoing voice calls between the wireless-access communication unit 106 and theMSC 116; and (3) the signaling of DTMF tones from theCPE 105 in the network direction during active calls. Preferably, transparent digit transmission is provided between the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and thebase station 109, since digit analysis is preferably carried out at thebase station 109. Further, the system also preferably provides transport capability via control transfer (CT-TRA) O-Notes for DTAP protocol messages. - A GSM DTAP mobility management entity, shown as the GSM-MM layer in FIG. 8, is used end-to-end (between the wireless
access communication unit 106 and the MSC 116) to run various mobility management procedures, including authentication and subscriber identification. Other mobility management procedures are supported on the O-interface 560 and the N-interface 562 as part of the protocols utilizing O-Notes and N-Notes, and are shown as the OTA-MM entity and NTS-MM entity in FIG. 8. These other mobility management procedures include location updating or network-level registration (both normal and periodic), IMSI detach or de-registration, temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI) reallocation, and mobility management connection establishment (for both normal and emergency calls). These mobility management procedures undergo interworking within thebase station 109 and thebase station controller 112, and thebase station controller 112 converts these into the corresponding GSM mobility management procedures over theA-interface 571. In addition, base-level registration (both normal and periodic) between the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and thebase station 109 is supported according to the O-Notes mobility management procedure. - The GSM-CM and GSM-MM protocol runs end-to-end between the wireless
access communication unit 106 and theMSC 116, and the protocol messages are relayed transparently through thebase station 109 and thebase station controller 112. The protocol messages may be encapsulated within transport O-Notes (CT-TRA) messages across the O-interface 560, transport N-Notes messages across the N-interface 562 using the LAPD signaling link between thebase station 109 andbase station controller 112, and BSSMAP messages over theA-interface 571 using the SCCP signaling link. - The over-the-air mobility management procedures are interworked in the
base station 109 with N-Notes mobility management procedures, shown as the NTS-MM Layer in FIG. 8. The NTS-MM procedures run over the LAPD signaling link of the N-interface 562, and are interworked in thebase station controller 112 with corresponding DTAP mobility management (GSM-MM) procedures on theA-interface 571. The GSM-MM protocol therefore runs partly end-to-end between the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and theMSC 116, and partly between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116. - Over-the-air radio resource management functions are provided by an OTA radio resource (OTA-RR) management protocol entity shown in FIG. 8. Such radio resource management functions include link acquisition, lost link recovery, bearer message ciphering, over-the-air slot negotiation and time slot interchange (in a TDMA system), digit transmission and analysis, assignment and mode change link release (whether initiated by the network or wireless access communication unit106), base assist information, and surrounding base table information. On the O-
interface 560, the radio resource management is carried out as part of the O-Notes protocol by the OTA-RR entity. - The O-Notes protocol over the O-
interface 560 includes link layer functions to manage the wireless communication channels (i.e., wireless communication links). These link layer management functions include ARQ, cyclic redundancy check (CRC), segmentation and de-segmentation, power control, and the like. - The elements of the radio resource functionality requiring interaction with the
base station controller 112 and theMSC 116 are interworked by thebase station 109 with the radio resource functionality within the N-Notes protocol on the N-interface 562, indicated by the NTS-RR entity in FIG. 8. Thebase station controller 112 in turn interworks the radio resource functionality with the BSSMAP layer functions on theA-interface 571. Radio resource management procedures such as channel assignment, channel release, and the like are initiated through BSSMAP procedures by theMSC 116, and thebase station controller 112 translates these into NTS-RR protocol procedures on the N-interface 562. - Over the N-
interface 562, the NTS-RR protocol procedures for radio resource management include ciphering, assignment and mode change, and link release. In addition to radio resource functions, the functionality of the NTS-RR entity includes procedures to manage the allocation and de-allocation of bearer channels on the backhaul link(s) of the N-interface 562. - On the N-
interface 562, the signaling link is based on the LAPD protocol. Over the A-interface, the BSSMAP messages are carried over SCCP connections. The SCCP and MTP layers are used to provide a robust signaling link between thebase station controller 112 and theMSC 116. - Various BSSMAP procedures are provided on the A-interface571 for supporting the functionality of the wireless
access communication unit 106. These BSSMAP procedures include, for example, assignment, blocking, reset, release, cipher mode control, and initial message. - Because the wireless
access communication unit 106 may, if desired, be deployed in a fixed manner, certain mobility features need not be supported. For example, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 need not be required to support in-call handover to a different base station, broadcast channels, asymmetric channels, sub-rate channels, aggregated channels, multiple mode traffic, ciphering of signaling messages, or an over-the-air D-channel. Also, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 need not support incoming call paging, SMS call invocation, or call related supplementary services. Eliminating these features makes the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 easier to implement, and simplifies support features required from the base station subsystem and other network-side components. - Mobility management connection establishment for normal calls is initiated by the mobility management entity (i.e., GSM-MM entity shown in FIG. 8) of the wireless
access communication unit 106. To do so, the mobility management entity sends a Connection Management (CM) Service Request message to theMSC 116, with the Service Type field indicating a normal call. TheMSC 116 responds by sending a CM Service Accept message. Upon receiving a CM Service Accept message from theMSC 116, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 continues with normal call set-up, as further described herein and/or in related applications incorporated by reference elsewhere herein. - For normal calls, the mobility management connection establishment procedure may encompass an authentication procedure. Such a procedure may be based on the DTAP mobility management signaling for authentication, and may run end-to-end between the
MSC 116 and the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - For emergency (i.e., “911”) calls, the mobility management entity (i.e., GSM-MM entity shown in FIG. 8) of the wireless
access communication unit 106 initiates a mobility management connection establishment procedure by sending a CM Service Request message, with the CM Service Type field indicating an emergency call, to theMSC 116. In response, theMSC 116 transmits a CM Service Accept message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Upon receiving the CM Service Accept message from theMSC 116, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 continues with emergency call setup. For emergency calls the network need not invoke an authentication procedure. - If the service request is rejected by the
MSC 116, or if a service request time-out expires, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may issue a reorder tone to theCPE 105, and abort the call establishment procedure. - Although the wireless
access communication unit 106 preferably utilizes a mobility management connection establishment procedure in the establishment of a call connection, the CPE trunks typically do not constitute mobile components of the system. Thecommunication system 101 adapts techniques utilized in a mobile communication system for facilitating setup and maintenance of awireless trunk 108 through the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. as generally described herein. Using aspects of a mobile communication system in thecommunication system 101 which includes the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 has the advantage of allowing existing mobile communication system infrastructures to support a wireless trunk in accordance with the present invention, without requiring a separate base station subsystem or other dedicated wireless path to thePSTN 125 to be constructed. - After the mobility management connection establishment procedure has been completed, the wireless
access communication unit 106 exchanges DTAP signaling with theMSC 116 to set up an outgoing call. The primary difference between normal and emergency call setup procedures is in the way the call is initiated. For a normal call, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 sends a DTAP Setup message to thebase station 109 with the Called Address field empty. Thebase station 109 fills in the Called Address field of the Setup message with the digits stored earlier as part of the digit analysis procedure, before relaying the Setup message to theMSC 116 across thebase station controller 112. For an emergency call, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 sends a DTAP Emergency Setup message to theMSC 116. The DTAP Emergency Setup message is relayed transparently through thebase station 109 and thebase station controller 112. TheMSC 116 returns a DTAP Call Proceeding message to indicate acceptance of the call request. - If the wireless
access communication unit 106 receives a DTAP Progress message from theMSC 116 indicating PSTN interworking, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 connects its speech path between the CPE trunk and the wireless communication link (e.g., an over-the-air time slot if the wireless communication channel is a TDMA time slot). The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then expects the call progress tones (busy/ringback) to arrive from the network (i.e., PSTN 125) inband. As the call progresses, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 translates the call progress signals received from theMSC 116 to appropriate tones or signals on the CPE trunk. - If the wireless
access communication unit 106 receives a DTAP Alerting message from 11, theMSC 116, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 generates a ringback tone towards theCPE 105. The tone is removed under certain conditions, including: (1) a DTAP Connect message is received from theMSC 116, indicating that the called user has answered the call; (2) the call is cleared from the network end, with a DTAP Disconnect or Release Complete message; (3) the call is released via a link level (over-the-air) release; (4) timer expiry occurs at the wirelessaccess communication unit 106; or (5) the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects an on-hook indication from theCPE 105. - If the wireless
access communication unit 106 receives a DTAP Disconnect or Release Complete message, indicating that the called party is busy, the action by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 depends on whether or not there is PSTN interworking. If the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 has received no indication of PSTN interworking, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 issues a busy tone to theCPE 105 and starts a busy tone timer. The busy tone is removed by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 if it detects an on-hook indication from theCPE 105, or upon expiration of busy tone timeout period timed by the busy tone timer. If, on the other hand, there is PSTN interworking when an indication is received that the called party is busy, a busy tone is issued inband over the bearer path by thePSTN 125, and is relayed through the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 all the way to theCPE 105. - If the wireless
access communication unit 106 receives a DTAP Connect message from the network, indicating that a connection has been achieved, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 connects the bearer path if it has not already done so, and returns a DTAP Connect Acknowledgment message to thePSTN 125. - In the event of an exception condition during call establishment, the wireless
access communication unit 106 aborts the call establishment procedure. For a ground-start CPE trunk, it also passes a disconnect indication to theCPE 105. - Call clearing is also preferably supported, and may be initiated either at the
CPE 105 or theMSC 116. TheCPE 105 initiates call clearing by issuing a disconnect signal to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. If theCPE 105 is the calling party for the call, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 commences timing of a call clearing guard timeout period (of, e.g., 600 milliseconds), at the end of which it releases the CPE trunk, clears the cal using DTAP signaling, and releases any over-the-air resources. - Call clearing is initiated on the network side (i.e., at the MSC116) by the transmission of a call clearing message from the network to the wireless
access communication unit 106. The response of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 depends upon whether the CPE trunk comprises a ground-start trunk or a loop-start trunk. If the CPE trunk is a ground-start trunk, then when the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 receives a call clearing message from thePSTN 125, it commences timing of a call clearing guard timeout period (of e.g., 600 milliseconds), at the end of which it delivers a disconnect indication to theCPE 105, and starts a permanent signal timer, the purpose of which is discussed further below. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 waits for a disconnect signal from theCPE 105 and, after receiving the disconnect signal, stops the permanent timer and releases the CPE trunk. In parallel, call clearing with the network is carried out to completion, and the over-the-air resources for the call get released. - If, on the other hand, the CPE trunk comprises a loop-start trunk, then when the wireless
access communication unit 106 receives a call clearing message from thePSTN 125, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 starts a permanent signal timer. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 waits for a disconnect signal from theCPE 105 and, after receiving the disconnect signal, stops the permanent timer and releases the CPE trunk. In parallel, call clearing with the network is carried out to completion, and the over-the-air resources for the call get released. - After network-initiated call clearing, if the user making the call through the
CPE 105 remains off-hook, a permanent signal (extended off-hook) state will arise on the CPE trunk. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 handles this situation using the permanent signal timer referred to above. If the permanent signal timer expires without a disconnect signal being received from theCPE 105, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 issues a reorder tone towards theCPE 105. If, after a predetermined amount of time (e.g., 60 seconds) of issuing the reorder tone in this state, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 still has not detected a disconnect from theCPE 105, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 removes the reorder tone and maintains the trunk in a busy state, pending the receipt of a disconnect from theCPE 105. - The call progress tones may be summarized as follows. A dial tone is issued from the wireless
access communication unit 106 to theCPE 105 when an off-hook transition is detected on an idle CPE trunk. A busy tone is issued (in the case of non-PSTN interworking only) when a DTAP Disconnect or Release Complete message is received at the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, with an indication of the called user being busy. A ringback tone is issued (in the case of non-PSTN interworking only) when a DTAP Alerting message is received. A reorder tone is issued during wireless access congestion conditions detected by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, or upon expiration of a permanent signal timer, as described above. - The wireless
access communication unit 106 may support transmission of DTMF tones during an active call. In the “forward” direction, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects DTMF tones generated by theCPE 105 and converts these tones into DTAP signaling towards theMSC 116. TheMSC 116, upon receiving the DTAP DTMF signaling messages, re-generates the DTMF tones towards thePSTN 125. In the “reverse” direction, DTMF tone signaling during an active call in such a manner is not generally supported by current GSM protocols. - The wireless
access communication unit 106 preferably supports two main types of registration: network-level and base-level. For both network-level and base-level registration. the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 performs registration of two different varieties. referred to as “normal” registration and “periodic” registration. Thus, in one embodiment of the invention, four types of registration are supported. - The two types of network-level registration supported by the wireless
access communication unit 106 include normal network-level registration and network-periodic registration. Since each CPE trunk connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is looked upon by the network as an individual subscriber, the registration procedure is typically carried out by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 on behalf of an individual CPE trunk. Each CPE trunk is separately registered according to its unique identifier (i.e., its IMSI). If the registration fails for a particular CPE trunk, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 marks the CPE trunk (or IMSI) as having failed registration. - Normal network-level registration is carried out when the wireless
access communication unit 106 is powered up, or when the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 changes location area, i.e., it starts communicating with abase station 109 that belongs to a location area different from the one in which it was previously registered. The registration procedure may comprise a normal location updating procedure on theA-interface 571. - FIG. 28 is a call flow diagram illustrating normal network-level registration. As shown in FIG. 28, upon power-up the wireless
access communication unit 106 establishes a wireless communication channel (e.g., an over-the-air time slot in a TDMA system, such as described previously with respect to FIG. 25). After acquiring the wireless communication channel, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 transmits a service request to thebase station 109 specifying that a logical link is requested for the transmission of operations and maintenance data concerning the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The service request may take the form of a Control Traffic Service Request (CT-SRQ) message. Thebase station 109 responds with a control traffic acknowledgment message. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then transmits one or more control traffic transport messages to thebase station 109 including information regarding the subscriber identifiers (i.e., IMSIs) of the CPE trunks and the equipment identifier (i.e., the IMEI) of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. In response, thebase station 109 enters the mapping between the IMEI and the IMSIs into its equipment/subscriber table (also referred to herein as its “IMEI table”). Thebase station 109 then formats an “alarm” message and sends an alarm to theOSS 122 with information identifying the wireless access communication unit 106 (i.e., its IMEI) and a message that the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 has registered. After transmitting registration information, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 releases the logical link by transmitting a Control Traffic Release (CT-REL) message to thebase station 109, as shown in FIG. 28. - In addition to normal network-level registration, the wireless
access communication unit 106 also may perform periodic network-level registration. To do so, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, after initial registration, periodically re-registers each IMSI (i.e., each CPE trunk), with a periodicity selected so that the duration between registrations is less than a prescribed time. For example, the prescribed time may be an amount of time that is less than the record retention time of the visitor location register (VLR) at theMSC 116. The prescribed time should also be selected as long enough so as not to be burdensome to the wireless network. The periodic network-level registration translates to a periodic location updating procedure on theA-interface 571. The periodicity is configurable in the GSM network infrastructure. - The wireless
access communication unit 106 preferably also supports two types of base-level registration: normal registration and base-periodic registration. For base-level registration, each CPE trunk is separately registered according to its unique identifier (i.e., IMSI). - Normal base-level registration is carried out when the wireless
access communication unit 106 starts communicating with abase station 109 that is different from, but belongs to the same location area, as the one with which it was previously registered. Normal base-level registration allows the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to receive a new Surrounding Base Table, without having to change location areas. The base-level registration procedure translates to a normal location updating procedure on the A-interface. - The wireless
access communication unit 106 also performs periodic base-level registration by periodically registering each IMSI (i.e., each CPE trunk) with thebase station 109. The periodicity of re-registration is controlled by thebase station 109. The periodicity is configurable through OAM&P, and may be selected such that the re-registration period is. for example, 16 seconds. - The base-periodic registration period can be used as a mechanism for monitoring the “health” of the wireless
access communication unit 106. In this aspect, the base-periodic registration may serve as a “heart-beat” for thebase station 109 to know that the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is still in communication with it. - De-registration is performed by the system on behalf of each CPE trunk connected to the wireless
access communication unit 106 when the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is powered off. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 when powered-off initiates a shut-down procedure that involves de-registration for each CPE trunk prior to actually powering down. - In case of a detected failure at the wireless
access communication unit 106, an alarm message is transmitted to report the failure to the operator. Upon detection of a fault, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 sends a fault notification (i.e., alarm message) to thebase station 109 using a Control Traffic Transport (CT-TRA) message. Thebase station 109 then sends a fault report to thebase station controller 112 using the base station object as the fault entity. - FIG. 29 is a call flow diagram illustrating alarm reporting. As shown in FIG. 29, a wireless communication channel (e.g., a time slot in a TDMA system, such as described with respect to FIG. 25) is first acquired if such a channel has not already been established. A service request is then sent to the
base station 109 from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 specifying that a logical link is needed from operations and maintenance type data concerning the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The service request takes the form of a Control Traffic Service Request (CT-SRQ) message. After receiving an control traffic acknowledgment message from thebase station 109, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is free to send alarm information to thebase station 109. The alarm information may be conveyed in more than one physical message if necessary. After transmitting the alarm information, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 releases the logical link by sending a Control Traffic Release (CT-REL) message. Thebase station 109 then packages the alarm information into a base station alarm message format, and sends it to the operations management center (OMC) 120 and/orOSS 122. - The format of an alarm message or alarm information sent by the wireless
access communication unit 106 to thebase station 109 may include multiple fields, including an identifier field, a failure type field, a status field, a failure cause field, and a log number field. - The identifier field contains information identifying the wireless
access communication unit 106, such as an international mobile equipment identity (IMEI) number. The failure type field contains information indicating the type of failure that has occurred e.g. communications failure, quality of service failure, processing failure, or equipment failure. The status field indicates whether the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is operational or degraded. The failure cause field indicates the reason for the failure, such as a radio unit failure, line card failure, or unknown failure, for example. The log number is used track the alarm. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may maintain a log of triggered alarms, each having a corresponding log number. The logged alarm information may be used for debugging at a later time. - If the failure concerns a resource (i.e., hardware or software) at the wireless access25,
communication unit 106, then the alarm report preferably identifies the failing resource if it can be identified. A fault table may be maintained in the control section of the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, so as to keep track of alarms in force. When ever an alarm is reported, an entry is made in the fault table. The fault table helps prevent the same alarm from being reported twice. The fault table may be cleared on power-on or reset. - The
base station 109 relays alarms initiated at the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to thebase station controller 112, using a base station alarm message format. The base station alarm message format may include multiple fields, such as a failure type field, fault severity field, failure cause field, and additional information field. The failure type field contains information indicating the type of failure (e.g., an equipment failure), the failure severity field indicates the seriousness of the failure (e.g., “warning”), the failure cause field indicates the source of the field (e.g., the wireless access communication unit 106), and the if) additional information field generally contains details regarding the failure and, in the specific case of an alarm from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, contains a copy of the alarm message received from the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating authentication procedures, including division of functionality, in a preferred embodiment of the
communication system 101. As shown in FIG. 27, an authentication triplet including a random number RAND, signed response SRES, and ciphering key Kc are stored in the VLR of theMSC 116, after being transferred upon request from theHLRIAuC 123. The random number RAND is sent to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, whereupon it is applied along with the subscriber key value K, to locally generate the signed response SRES and ciphering key Kc. The signed response SRES is returned by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to theMSC 116 for comparison against the SRES stored at the VLR of theMSC 116. The ciphering key Kc is used thereafter for ciphering transmissions across the wireless communication channel. - Bearer ciphering at the user end is performed at the wireless
access communication unit 106. Ciphering of bearer information on the network end is preferably carried out at thetranscoding unit 115. Ciphering of signaling messages (e.g., control traffic) may optionally be carried out. Further details regarding authentication and ciphering may be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,580,906, and U.S. Pat. No. 6,097,817, both of which have been previously incorporated herein by reference. - Operation of preferred embodiments of the invention will now be described in more detail, with reference as appropriate to the call flow diagrams depicted in FIGS. 12 through 22.
- In accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention as depicted in FIG. 1 the wireless
access communication unit 106 provides the capability to establish, maintain and tear down normal outgoing voice calls through a GSM-based segment that provides connectivity to the long distance functionality of thePSTN 125. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and other system components provide wireline transparency to aCPE 105 by supporting standard signaling functions on the CPE interface, including trunk supervisory signaling, address signaling, and provision of call progress tones to theCPE 105. - As part of the initialization procedure after power-up, and preferably periodically thereafter, the wireless
access communication unit 106 registers with anearby base station 109 and also with thePSTN 125. In this context, registration may generally be described as the process by which a subscriber (i.e., a CPE trunk 602) connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 identifies itself to the network. Since each CPE trunk connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is looked upon by the network as an individual subscriber, the registration procedure is typically carried out on behalf of an individual CPE trunk, and may need to be repeated for multiple CPE trunks. - FIG. 12 is a call flow diagram illustrating a network-level registration procedure.
- As a first step in the procedure illustrated in FIG. 12, the wireless
access communication unit 106 acquires a wireless communication channel (e.g., a time slot in a TDMA or TDD system, or a frequency channel in an FDD system, or other defined channel) to anearby base station 109. The wireless communication channel is acquired according to the particular protocol utilized by the wireless system. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then performs a network-level registration procedure, according to the particular registration protocol utilized by the system. The registration procedure may involve, for example, a location updating procedure on the A-interface. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 performs network-level registration at regular intervals thereafter, with periodicity controlled by the network infrastructure. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may also perform network-level registration if it starts communicating through abase station 109 in a different location area from the base station with which it had been previously communicating. After registration, the wireless communication channel is surrendered, and theMSC 116 initiates a resource release procedure, as illustrated in FIG. 12. - In addition to network-level registration, the wireless
access communication unit 106 may also perform periodic registration with thebase station 109 at regular intervals, with a periodicity controlled by thebase station 109. For each registration attempt, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 acquires a wireless communication channel, registers, and then surrenders the wireless communication channel, unless a call is in progress. If a call is in progress, thewireless communication unit 106 need not acquire a new channel, but can, if possible under the particular wireless protocol, send registration information over the existing communication channel. In addition to periodic base-level registration, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 also performs initial registration with abase station 109 when it starts communicating through a base station different from but in the same location area as a base station with which it was previously communicating. - De-registration is performed by the system on behalf of each CPE trunk connected to the wireless
access communication unit 106 when the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is powered off. FIG. 13 is a call flow diagram illustrating a network level de-registration procedure. As a first step in the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 acquires a wireless communication channel (e.g., a TDMA time slot) to anearby base station 109. The wireless communication channel is acquired according to the particular RF protocol utilized by the wireless system. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then performs a network-level de-registration procedure, such as an IMSI detach procedure, according to the particular protocol utilized by the system. After de-registration, the wireless communication channel is surrendered, and theMSC 116 initiates a resource release procedure, as illustrated in FIG. 13. - After registration by the wireless
access communication unit 106, outgoing calls may be placed to thePSTN 125 via theCPE 105, wirelessaccess communication unit 106 and base station subsystem. FIGS. 14 through 19 are call flow diagrams illustrating dial tone, digit transmission, digit analysis and call setup for outgoing calls under various types of CPE embodiments, including PBXs and KTSs with different levels of routing intelligence. FIG. 14, for example, is a call flow diagram illustrating dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for aCPE 105 embodied as a “dumb” PBX—i.e., a PBX without the ability to route calls based on analysis of the dialed number. As shown in FIG. 14, the user 102 (e.g., a telephone station, as shown in FIG. 1) goes off-hook, sending an off-hook stimulus to the CPE 105 (i.e., the PBX). Upon detecting the off-hook signal, thePBX 105 issues a dial tone to theuser 102. Theuser 102 then dials an access code (i.e., a predetermined digit, such as ‘8’) to access the wireless trunk offered by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Upon detecting the access code digit, thePBX 105 removes the dial tone and seizes a trunk connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - On detecting seizure of a trunk, the wireless
access communication unit 106 issues a secondary dial tone to theuser 102. The secondary dial tone is delivered via thePBX 105 to theuser 102. In parallel to applying the secondary dial tone, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 commences acquisition of an over-the-air communication channel. In a TDMA or TDD system, for example, this step in the procedure generally entails seizing an over-the-air time slot. - Upon detecting the dial tone, the
user 102 starts dialing the digits of the party to be called. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects the first digit, after which it removes the secondary dial tone. If acquisition of the over-the-air communication channel has not been completed by this time, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 stores the received digits in a temporary buffer. - After it successfully acquires an over-the-air communication channel, as shown in FIG. 14, the wireless
access communication unit 106 sends a control traffic service request (CT-SRQ) message to thebase station 109 requesting service from the digit analysis application in thebase station 109. Thebase station 109 commences the digit analysis application, and returns a control traffic acknowledgment (CT-ACK) message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then transmits the digits received from theuser 102 to thebase station 109 one-by-one as they are received from theuser 102. Each digit is sent as part of a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message. The value of each digit may be indicated by a field of, e.g., four bits in the CT-TRA; TRA message. Thebase station 109 stores each received digit. After all address digits have been received at thebase station 109, thebase station 109 detects that the dialing sequence is complete (according to its digit analysis), and returns a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message to the centralcall processing unit 106, with a message content indicating that dialing is complete. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is then able to proceed with the launching of the call. - FIG. 15 is similar to FIG. 14, but illustrates dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a
CPE 105 embodied as a “dumb” KTS, i.e., a key type system without the ability to route calls based on analysis of the dialed number. As shown in FIG. 15, theuser 102 first selects an outgoing line to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Theuser 102 then goes off-hook, sending an off-hook stimulus to the CPE 105 (i.e., the KTS). Upon detecting the off-hook signal, theCPE 105 seizes a trunk connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 detects the trunk seizure, and in response issues a dial tone to theuser 102. In parallel with applying the dial tone, the wireless access communication unit proceeds to acquire an over-the-air communication channel. In a TDMA or TDD system, this step generally entails seizing an over-the-air time slot. - When the
user 102 detects the dial tone, theuser 102 starts dialing the digits of the party to be called. After detecting the first digit, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 removes the dial tone. If acquisition of the over-the-air communication channel has not been completed by this time, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 stores the digits in a temporary buffer. - When it successfully acquires an over-the-air communication channel, the wireless
access communication unit 106 sends a control traffic service request (CT-SRQ) message to thebase station 109, as shown in FIG. 15, requesting service from the digit analysis application in thebase station 109. Thebase station 109 commences the digit analysis application, and returns a control traffic acknowledgment (CT-ACK) message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then transmits the digits received from theuser 102 to thebase station 109 one-by-one as they are received from theuser 102. Each digit is sent as part of a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message, as described with respect to FIG. 14. Thebase station 109 stores each received digit. After all address digits have been received at thebase station 109, thebase station 109 detects that the dialing sequence is complete (according to its digit analysis), and returns a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message to the centralcall processing unit 106, with a message content indicating that dialing is complete. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is then able to proceed with the launching of the call. - FIG. 16, in a fashion similar to FIGS. 14 and 16, illustrates dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis, but for a
CPE 105 embodied as a PBX system which has sufficient built-in intelligence to route calls based on analysis of the dialed number. As shown in FIG. 16, theuser 102 first goes off-hook, sending an off-hook stimulus to the CPE 105 (i.e., the PBX). Upon detecting the off-hook signal, theCPE 105 issues a dial tone to theuser 102. Theuser 102 then dials an access code (i.e., a predetermined digit, such as ‘8’ or ‘9’) to access an outside line. Upon detecting the access code digit, theCPE 105 removes the dial tone and starts digit analysis. On detecting that the dialed number is the predetermined digit of the access code, theCPE 105 issues a secondary dial tone to theuser 102. - The
user 102 then starts dialing the digits of the party to be called. Upon detecting the first digit from theuser 102, theCPE 105 removes the dial tone and starts digit analysis. - After all the digits have been received by the
CPE 105, theCPE 105 determines from its digit analysis that a complete telephone number has been dialed. TheCPE 105 also determines from its digit analysis whether or not the call is long distance (e.g., the first digit of the call to be placed following the access code is a ‘1’), and if the call is long distance seizes a trunk connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. If the call is not long distance, theCPE 105 routes the call directly to thePSTN 125. - Upon detecting seizure of a CPE trunk, the wireless
access communication unit 106 issues a secondary dial tone to theuser 102. This secondary dial tone is muted by theCPE 105 on the user side—i.e., it is not passed along to theuser 102. In parallel with applying the secondary dial tone, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 proceeds to acquire an over-the-air communication channel. In a TDMA or TDD system, for example, this step generally entails seizing an over-the-air time slot. When the secondary dial tone is detected by theCPE 105, theCPE 105 begins to outpulse to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 the digits earlier received from theuser 102 as DTMF tones. Upon detecting the first digit (i.e., DTMF tone), the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 removes the secondary dial tone. If acquisition of the over-the-air communication channel has not been completed by this time, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 stores the digits in a temporary buffer until such time as a wireless communication channel is obtained. - After it successfully acquires an over-the-air communication channel, the wireless
access communication unit 106 sends a control traffic service request (CT-SRQ) message to thebase station 109 requesting service from the digit analysis application in thebase station 109. Thebase station 109 commences the digit analysis application, and returns a control traffic acknowledgment (CT-ACK) message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then transmits the digits received from theuser 102 to thebase station 109 one-by-one as they are received from theuser 102. Each digit is sent as part of a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message. Thebase station 109 stores each received digit. After all address digits have been received at thebase station 109, thebase station 109 detects that the dialing sequence is complete, and returns a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message to the centralcall processing unit 106, with a message content indicating that dialing is complete. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is then able to proceed with the launching of the call. - FIG. 17 is similar to FIGS. 14, 15 and16, but illustrates dial tone, digit transmission and digit analysis for a
CPE 105 embodied as a key type system (KTS) which has sufficient built-in intelligence to route calls based on analysis of the dialed number. As shown in FIG. 17, theuser 102 first goes off-hook, sending an off-hook stimulus to the CPE 105 (i.e., the KTS). Upon detecting the off-hook signal, theCPE 105 issues a dial tone to theuser 102. Theuser 102 then starts dialing the digits of the party to be called. Upon detecting the first digit from theuser 102, theCPE 105 removes the dial tone and starts digit analysis. - After all the digits have been received by the
CPE 105, theCPE 105 determines from its digit analysis that a complete telephone number has been dialed. TheCPE 105 also determines from its digit analysis whether or not the call is long distance (e.g., the first digit dialed is a ‘1’), and if the call is long distance seizes a trunk connected to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. If the call is not long distance, theCPE 105 routes the call directly to thePSTN 125. - When a trunk is seized, the wireless
access communication unit 106 issues a secondary dial tone to theCPE 105. This secondary dial tone is muted by theCPE 105 on the user side—i.e., it is not passed to theuser 102. In parallel with applying the secondary dial tone, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 proceeds to acquire an over-the-air communication channel. In a TDMA or TDD system, this step generally entails seizing an over-the-air time slot. When the secondary dial tone is detected by theCPE 105, theCPE 105 begins to outpulse the digits earlier received from theuser 102 to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Upon detecting the first digit, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 removes the secondary dial tone. If acquisition of the over-the-air communication channel has not been completed by this time, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 stores the digits in a temporary buffer. - After it successfully acquires an over-the-air communication channel, the wireless
access communication unit 106 sends a control traffic service request (CT-SRQ) message to thebase station 109 requesting service from the digit analysis application in thebase station 109. Thebase station 109 commences the digit analysis application, and returns a control traffic acknowledgment (CT-ACK) message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 then transmits the digits received from theuser 102 to thebase station 109 one-by-one as they are received from theuser 102. Each digit is sent as part of a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message. Thebase station 109 stores each received digit. After all address digits have been received at thebase station 109, thebase station 109 detects that the dialing sequence is complete, and returns a control traffic transport (CT-TRA) message to the centralcall processing unit 106, with a message content indicating that dialing is complete. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 is then able to proceed with the launching of the call. - If the wireless
access communication unit 106 issues a dial tone (or a secondary dial tone) and does not receive digits from theCPE 105 within a preset amount of time, a dial timeout condition will occur. In such a case, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 releases any over-the-air communication channel that it may have seized and issues permanent treatment to the user (i.e., performs a de-registration procedure, if necessary, and causes theMSC 116 to release any resources allocated for the call). - FIGS. 18 and 19 are call flow diagrams illustrating successful call setup procedures in two scenarios. FIG. 18 illustrates a call flow for a successful CPE-originated normal (i.e., non-emergency) call setup sequence, with non-PSTN interworking at the
MSC 116. As depicted in FIG. 18, provision of the dial tone, transmission of digits and digit analysis is carried out according to any of the scenarios illustrated in the call flow diagrams of FIGS. 14 through 17. In each instance the call flow terminates with an end of dialing indication from thebase station 109 to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Upon receiving the end of dialing indication from thebase station 109, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 initiates a mobility management connection establishment procedure for a normal call. This procedure results in an SCCP link being established for the call across the A-interface 571 (assuming a GSM system), and further results in a mobility management connection being set up with theMSC 116 for handling the call. Part of this procedure may, if desired entail authentication and cipher mode setting procedures for the call. - After completion of the mobility management connection procedure, the wireless
access communication unit 106 sends a direct transfer application part (DTAP) Setup message to thebase station 109, as illustrated in FIG. 18. The DTAP Setup message contains an empty called party address field, and is directed towards theMSC 116. Thebase station 109 intercepts the DTAP Setup message and fills in the called address field with the digits received from the wireless access communication unit earlier during the digit analysis step. - The
base station 109 then forwards the DTAP Setup message, via thebase station controller 112, to theMSC 116. TheMSC 116 acknowledges the receipt of the DTAP Setup message by sending a DTAP Call Proceeding message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, as illustrated in FIG. 18. - A bearer resource assignment procedure is then executed on each interface of the wireless fixed-access system, starting from the
A-interface 571 and progressing to the O-interface 562. The bearer resource assignment procedure results in bearer channels being assigned on theA-interface 571, N-interface 562 and O-interface 560, and a switched connection being set up through thebase station controller 112. - After the bearer resource assignment procedure is complete, the
MSC 116 sends a DTAP Alerting message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 provides a ringback tone to theuser 102, via the inband path through the CPE 105 (i.e., the PBX or KTS, or other similar system). When the called party answers the call, theMSC 116 sends a DTAP Connect message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. At that point the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 attaches its speech path and removes the ringback tone to theuser 102. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 responds to theMSC 116 with a DTAP Connect Acknowledgment message, and the call is then in a conversation state. - FIG. 19, like FIG. 18, illustrates a call flow for a successful CPE-originated normal call setup sequence, but with PSTN interworking at the
MSC 116. As depicted in FIG. 19, provision of the dial tone, transmission of digits and digit analysis is carried out according to any of the scenarios illustrated in the call flow diagrams of FIGS. 14 through 17. Upon receiving an end of dialing indication from thebase station 109, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 initiates a mobility management connection establishment procedure for a normal call. Similar to the call flow of FIG. 18, this procedure results in an SCCP link being established for the call across the A-interface (assuming a GSM system), and further results in a mobility management connection being set up with theMSC 116 for handling the call. Part of this procedure may, if desired, entail authentication and cipher mode setting procedures for the call. - After completion of the mobility management connection procedure, the wireless
access communication unit 106 sends a DTAP Setup message to thebase station 109. The DTAP Setup message contains an empty called party address field, and is directed towards theMSC 116. Thebase station 109 intercepts the DTAP Setup message and fills in the called address field with the digits received from the wireless access communication unit earlier during the digit analysis step. Thebase station 109 then forwards the DTAP Setup message, via thebase station controller 112, to theMSC 116. TheMSC 116 acknowledges the receipt of the DTAP Setup message by sending a DTAP Call Proceeding message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, as illustrated in FIG. 18. A bearer resource assignment procedure is then executed on each interface of the wireless fixed-access system, starting from the A-interface and progressing to the O-interface, similar to the call flow of FIG. 18. The bearer resource assignment procedure results in bearer channels being assigned on the A-interface, N-interface and O-interface, and a switched connection being set up through thebase station controller 112. - After the bearer resource assignment procedure is complete, the
MSC 116 sends a DTAP Progress message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, indicating interworking with thePSTN 125. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 attaches its speech path at this point. The network senses the ringback tone over the connected speech path, and the ringback tone is relayed by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 to theuser 102, via the CPE 105 (i.e., the KTS or PBX, or other similar system). When the called party answers the call, the network removes the ringback tone. TheMSC 116 sends a DTAP Connect message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 responds with a DTAP Connect Acknowledgment message, and the call then moves to a conversation state. - In either call flow scenario depicted in FIG. 18 or19, if the called party is busy, the call will generally be rejected. In the case of non-PSTN interworking, a busy tone is sent from the wireless
access communication unit 106 to theuser 102 in response to a DTAP Disconnect message from theMSC 116, and a DTAP release procedure is initiated. When an on-hook signal is detected from theuser 102, the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 initiates a call resource release procedure. In the case of PSTN-interworking, the busy tone is sent from thePSTN 125. When theCPE 105 detects an on-hook signal from theuser 102, it sends a disconnect message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, which then initiates a DTAP release procedure followed by a call resource release procedure. - In the case of ISDN interworking on the long-distance network interface, the wireless
access communication unit 106 generates the appropriate call progress tones to theCPE 105 based on DTAP signaling received from theMSC 116. Such call progress tones include busy tones and ringback tones, for example. In case of PSTN interworking, these call progress tones are generated by thePSTN 125 and passed inband to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, which relays them to theCPE 105. The dial tone is always generated by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Also, a reorder tone may be generated by the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 during congestion conditions or as part of permanent treatment. - FIGS. 20 through 22 are call flow diagrams depicting various call scenarios. FIG. 20 illustrates a call flow for a call waiting situation during an active call. As illustrated in FIG. 20, a first user is engaged in an active call over the network. A second user desires to place a call to the first user, and causes an off-hook signal to be generated. The CPE105 (i.e., KTS, PBX or similar type system) detects the off-hook signal, and responds with a dial tone. The second user dials the telephone number of the first user, and because the call is not long distance (but rather is station-to-station) it is handled by the
CPE 105 itself rather then sending it to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. Upon detecting the first digit from the second user, theCPE 105 removes the dial tone. - After the number is dialed the
CPE 105 attempts to deliver the call to the first user. Knowing that the first user is already engaged in a call, theCPE 105 issues a call waiting tone to the first user, indicating to the first user that another caller is attempting contact. TheCPE 105 also issues a ringback tone to the second user, to indicate that the first user is being paged. - If the first user responds to the call waiting tone with a hook flash, the
CPE 105 detects the hook flash signal and places the initial conversation on hold. TheCPE 105 then connects the first user and the second user in a conversation. The first user can then toggle between conversations by using the hook flash signal, as illustrated in FIG. 20. - FIG. 21 is a call flow diagram illustrating a three-way call setup scenario. At the start of the call flow shown in FIG. 21 it is assumed that a first user is already engaged in an active call over the network. The first user then decides to place a station-to-station call to a second user. To do so, the first user delivers a hook-flash signal to the
CPE 105. TheCPE 105 responds by providing a recall dial tone to the first user, and by placing the original conversation on hold. The first user then dials the second user's extension. When theCPE 105 detects the first digit of the dialed extension, it terminates the recall dial tone. - After the dialing of the extension is complete, the
CPE 105 attempts to deliver the call to the second user. At the same time, theCPE 105 delivers a ringback tone to the first user. When theCPE 105 receives an off-hook signal from the second user, it terminates the ringback tone to the first user. The first user and second user are then able to converse in an active call. Upon detecting a hook flash signal from the first user, theCPE 105 connects the two calls so as to effectuate a three-way call. - In each of the call flow situations of FIGS. 20 and 21, the call feature is provided to the end users in a transparent manner. Likewise, the calls are effectuated over the
PSTN 125 in a manner transparent to it as well. - FIG. 22 illustrates a DTMF signaling procedure during an active call from the
CPE 105 to thePSTN 125. On detecting a DTMF tone from theCPE 105 which exceeds a predefined minimum DTMF timeout period (e.g., 20 milliseconds), the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 sends a DTAP Start DTMF message to theMSC 116. The DTAP Start DTMF message indicates that a digit is being sent. When theMSC 116 receives this message, it re-generates the DTMF tone towards the network, and returns a DTAP Start DTMF Acknowledgment message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - When the wireless
access communication unit 106 detects the DTAP Start DTMF Acknowledgment message, it sends a DTAP Stop DTMF message to theMSC 116. Upon receiving the DTAP Stop DTMF message, the MSC stops sending the DTMF tone towards the network. TheMSC 116 returns a DTAP Stop DTMF Acknowledgment message to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. The procedure is repeated for each DTMF tone sent by theCPE 105. - The DTAP Start DTMF message and DTAP Stop DTMF message are both messages supported by existing GSM protocol. The wireless
access communication unit 106 makes use of the DTAP Start DTMF message and DTAP Stop DTMF message to transfer information relating to DTMF tones during an active call, in a transparent manner to thebase station 109 andbase station controller 112. The DTMF tones can thereby be related across the wireless communication channel and regenerated at theMSC 116 before being relayed to the network. - Both normal and emergency calls can be handled by the
preferred communication system 101 of FIG. 1. Emergency calls (i.e., “911” calls) are preferably routed by theCPE 105 directly to thePSTN 125. This may be accomplished in the same manner other calls are routed. For example, the user may dial a PSTN access code for an emergency call (in the case of a PBX), or may select a PSTN trunk from the desksets (in the case of a KTS). - Alternatively, the
CPE 105 can be configured to route emergency calls to a PSTN trunk by analyzing the received digits. It may nevertheless be desirable to provide the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 with the capability to establish, maintain and tear down emergency calls if it receives a trigger to initiate such a call. The wirelessaccess communication unit 106 may perform these emergency call operations using a GSM-based segment. - FIGS. 23 and 24 are frequency distribution diagrams illustrating alternative spectral allocations for wireless resources in two particular embodiments of the invention. FIG. 23 shows a possible spectral allocation over an available over-the-air frequency bandwidth of 5 MHz. As shown in FIG. 23, a 5 MHz bandwidth may be divided into three sub-bands having center frequencies spaced 1.6 MHz apart, and having 0.9 MHz spacing from each peripheral center frequency to the outer edge of the 5 MHz bandwidth. FIG. 24 shows a possible spectral allocation over an available over-the-air frequency bandwidth of 6.6 MHz. As shown in FIG. 24, a 6.6 MHz bandwidth may be divided into four sub-bands having center frequencies spaced 1.6 MHz apart, and having 0.9 MHz spacing from each peripheral center frequency to the outer edge of the 6.6 MHz bandwidth. In an embodiment according to either FIG. 23 or FIG. 24, a wireless transmitter (at either the
base station 109 or the wireless access communication unit 106) transmits a signal, preferably a direct sequence spread spectrum signal, having a maximum bandwidth of approximately 1.6 MHz. The particular spectral allocations in FIGS. 23 and 24 are meant to be illustrative only, and illustrate possible spectral allocations for a preferred spread spectrum wireless communication path; however, any spectral allocation may be made serving the purposes of the particular wireless connection utilized between thebase station 109 and the wirelessaccess communication unit 106. - While one or more embodiments have been described above in accordance with various aspects of the present invention, a number of variations of these embodiments exist incorporating the same or similar principles of operation as described herein. For example, it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that the functionality of the
CPE 105 and the wirelessaccess communication unit 106 can be combined into a single unit. Also, one ormore telephone stations 102 can be connected directly to the wirelessaccess communication unit 106, bypassing theCPE 105. Also, theCPE 105 need not be connected to thetelephone stations 102 with telephone lines, but may be wirelessly connected thereto (i.e., a wireless PBX). - A local area communication system according to certain aspects of the present invention may be comparatively easy to deploy in remote and/or rural areas, in contrast to systems requiring landline connections from a PBX or KTS to the network. With the addition of connecting the wireless access communication unit to the PBX or KTS, a remotely-located local area communication system can obtain benefits of a wireless network (including long distance access) for relatively little extra deployment effort.
- While preferred embodiments of the invention have been described herein, many variations are possible which remain within the concept and scope of the invention. Such variations would become clear to one of ordinary skill in the art after inspection of the specification and the drawings. The invention therefore is not to be restricted except within the spirit and scope of any appended claims.
Claims (38)
1. A method comprising:
performing connection management and mobility management functions between a wireless access communication unit and a cellular network base station using GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) connection management and GSM mobility management; and
transporting call data over a wireless connection between the wireless access communication unit and the base station using a non-GSM over-the-air physical layer protocol.
2. The method of claim 1 , further comprising establishing a plurality of bearer paths between the wireless access communication unit and the base station, each bearer path corresponding to a wired subscriber unit connected to the wireless access communication unit.
3. The method of claim 2 , further comprising establishing and maintaining a plurality of SCCP (Signaling Connection Control Part) links between a cellular network base station controller, coupled to the base station, and a cellular network mobile switching center, one SCCP link for each of the bearer paths.
4. The method of claim 1 , wherein transporting call data over the wireless connection comprises transporting the call data using an IS-661 format.
5. The method of claim 1 , wherein transporting call data over the wireless connection comprises:
assigning, from among a plurality of time slots of a time frame, one or more duplex time slots to the wireless access communication unit, one of the duplex time slots being assigned for each of a plurality of wired subscriber units desiring to communicate over the wireless connection;
transmitting, over a first frequency band, user-to-base traffic messages from the wireless access communication unit to the base station during a user transmission segment in each of the duplex time slots; and
receiving, over a second frequency band, base-to-user traffic messages from the base station to the wireless access communication unit during a base transmission segment in each of the duplex time slots.
6. The method of claim 5 , wherein the user transmission segment and the base transmission segment of each duplex time slot are separated by one-half the duration of the time frame.
7. The method of claim 1 , wherein using a non-GSM over-the-air physical layer protocol comprises using a non-GSM over-the-air physical layer protocol end-to-end between the wireless access communication unit and a cellular network mobile switching center coupled to the base station.
8. The method of claim 1 , wherein the connection management and mobility management functions provide at least call set-up, maintenance and release functions for each of a plurality of wired subscriber units coupled to the wireless access communication unit.
9. The method of claim 1 , further comprising transporting the call data between the base station and a cellular network mobile switching center using a GSM protocol.
10. The method of claim 1 , further comprising:
transmitting call data received from the wireless access communication unit over a backhaul connection from the base station to a cellular network base station controller;
relaying the call data received from the wireless access communication unit from the base station controller to a wireless network mobile switching center using a GSM protocol;
transmitting from the mobile switching center to the base station controller call data intended for the wireless access communication unit using the GSM protocol; and
relaying the call data intended for the wireless access communication unit to the base station over the backhaul connection.
11. The method of claim 1 , wherein transporting call data over the wireless connection comprises transmitting signaling messages between the wireless access communication unit and the base station.
12. A machine-readable medium having stored thereon data representing instructions which, when executed by a machine, cause the machine to perform operations comprising:
performing connection management and mobility management functions between a wireless access communication unit and a cellular network base station using GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) connection management and GSM mobility management; and
transporting call data over a wireless connection between the wireless access communication unit and the base station using a non-GSM over-the-air physical layer protocol.
13. The medium of claim 12 , further comprising instructions which, when executed by the machine, cause the machine to perform further operations comprising establishing a plurality of bearer paths between the wireless access communication unit and the base station, each bearer path corresponding to a wired subscriber unit connected to the wireless access communication unit.
14. The medium of claim 12 , wherein the instructions for transporting call data over the wireless connection comprise instructions which, when executed by the machine, cause the machine to perform further operations comprising:
assigning, from among a plurality of time slots of a time frame, one or more duplex time slots to the wireless access communication unit, one of the duplex time slots being assigned for each of a plurality of wired subscriber units desiring to communicate over the wireless connection;
transmitting, over a first frequency band, user-to-base traffic messages from the wireless access communication unit to the base station during a user transmission segment in each of the duplex time slots; and
receiving, over a second frequency band, base-to-user traffic messages from the base station to the wireless access communication unit during a base transmission segment in each of the duplex time slots.
15. The medium of claim 12 , further comprising instructions which, when executed by the machine, cause the machine to perform further operations comprising:
transmitting call data received from the wireless access communication unit over a backhaul connection from the base station to a cellular network base station controller;
relaying the call data received from the wireless access communication unit from the base station controller to a wireless network mobile switching center using a GSM protocol;
transmitting from the mobile switching center to the base station controller call data intended for the wireless access communication unit using the GSM protocol; and
relaying the call data intended for the wireless access communication unit to the base station over the backhaul connection.
16. A mobile switching center,
the mobile switching center being connected to a base station controller, and communicating with the base station controller using a GSM protocol,
the mobile switching center also being connected to a wireless access unit that provides a wireless communication path using a non-GSM over-the-air physical layer protocol between wired subscriber units and a base station coupled to the base station controller, the mobile switching center performing with the wireless access unit connection management and mobility management functions using GSM connection management and GSM mobility management protocols end-to-end, the connection management and mobility management functions providing at least call set-up, maintenance and release functions for each of the wired subscriber units.
17. The mobile switching center of claim 16 , further comprising a transcoding unit, wherein the mobile switching center is connected to the base station controller through the transcoding unit.
18. The mobile switching center of claim 16 , wherein the base station controller and the mobile switching center communicate across a GSM A-interface.
19. The mobile switching center of claim 16 , wherein the mobile switching center maintain a plurality of SCCP links with the base station controller, one SCCP link for each user interface. over which a call is connected from one of the wired subscriber units.
20. The mobile switching center of claim 16 , wherein the mobile switching center suppports and maintains calls from the wired subscriber units to the mobile switching center via the base station and the base station controller.
21. A communication system, comprising:
a base station;
a wireless access communication unit connected to a plurality of wired subscriber units, the wireless access communication unit providing a communication path between the base station and the wired subscriber units, the communication path including a wireless connection over which the wireless access communication unit and base station communicate using a non-GSM over-the-air physical layer protocol;
a base station controller connected to the base station; and
a mobile switching center connected to the base station controller, the mobile switching center and the base station controller communicating using a GSM protocol, the mobile switching center and the wireless access communication unit performing connection management and mobility management functions using GSM connection management and GSM mobility management protocols end-to-end, the connection management and mobility management functions providing at least call set-up, maintenance and release functions for each of the wired subscriber units.
22. The communication system of claim 21 , wherein the non-GSM over-the-air physical layer protocol comprises an IS-661 over-the-air protocol.
23. The communication system of claim 21 , wherein the base station comprises at least two backhaul transceivers.
24. The communication system of claim 23 , wherein the backhaul transceivers comprise logical terminal endpoints, each backhaul transceiver supporting a first logical link for traffic signaling and a second logical link for operations, administration and management signaling.
25. The communication system of claim 24 , wherein the base station multiplexes the first logical link and the second logical link of each of the backhaul transceivers onto a single time slot for communication to the base station controller.
26. The communication system of claim 24 , wherein functional entities of the base station are addressable using service access point identifiers.
27. The communication system of claim 24 , wherein the base station controller and the wireless access communication unit comprise endpoints for voice encoding and decoding.
28. The communication system of claim 24 , wherein the base station controller and the wireless access communication unit comprise endpoints for encryption and decryption of bearer traffic.
29. The communication system of claim 24 , wherein the base station controller and the wireless access communication unit comprise endpoints for forward error correction.
30. The communication system of claim 24 , further comprising a transcoding unit, wherein the mobile switching center is connected to the base station controller through the transcoding unit.
31. The communication system of claim 24 , wherein the base station controller and the mobile switching center communicate across a GSM A-interface.
32. The communication system of claim 24 , wherein the wireless access communication unit is connected to the wired subscriber units through a local area telephone switch.
33. The communication system of claim 32 , wherein the local area telephone switch comprises either a private branch exchange (PBX) or key telephone system (KTS).
34. The communication system of claim 32 , wherein the wireless access communication unit comprises
a plurality of subscriber ports connected to the local area telephone switch over a plurality of trunks;
a plurality of user interfaces connected to the subscriber ports, one user interface for each subscriber port;
a radio transceiver; and
a controller connected to the user interfaces and the radio transceiver, the controller managing the transfer of data between the user interfaces and the radio transceiver.
35. The communication system of claim 34 , wherein the user interfaces are individually addressable.
36. The communication system of claim 34 , wherein the base station controller and the mobile switching center maintain a plurality of SCCP links, one SCCP link for each user interface over which a call is connected from one of the wired subscriber units.
37. The communication system of claim 34 , wherein the wireless access communication unit sets up and maintains calls from the wired subscriber units to the mobile switching center via the base station and the base station controller.
38. The communication system of claim 24 , wherein the base station supports a multiple access communication protocol, the base station establishing wireless communication paths with mobile user stations upon demand.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10/803,386 US20040174847A1 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2004-03-18 | Wireless access unit using standardized management and connection protocols |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US08/988,546 US6208627B1 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 1997-12-10 | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
US09/812,534 US6751205B2 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2001-03-19 | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
US10/803,386 US20040174847A1 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2004-03-18 | Wireless access unit using standardized management and connection protocols |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/812,534 Continuation US6751205B2 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2001-03-19 | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20040174847A1 true US20040174847A1 (en) | 2004-09-09 |
Family
ID=25534240
Family Applications (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US08/988,546 Expired - Lifetime US6208627B1 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 1997-12-10 | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
US09/812,534 Expired - Lifetime US6751205B2 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2001-03-19 | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
US10/803,374 Expired - Fee Related US7774278B2 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2004-03-18 | Wireless access unit with trunk interface |
US10/803,386 Abandoned US20040174847A1 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2004-03-18 | Wireless access unit using standardized management and connection protocols |
Family Applications Before (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US08/988,546 Expired - Lifetime US6208627B1 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 1997-12-10 | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
US09/812,534 Expired - Lifetime US6751205B2 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2001-03-19 | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
US10/803,374 Expired - Fee Related US7774278B2 (en) | 1997-12-10 | 2004-03-18 | Wireless access unit with trunk interface |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (4) | US6208627B1 (en) |
Cited By (24)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7061924B1 (en) * | 2001-05-24 | 2006-06-13 | Intel Corporation | Methods and apparatus for remote metering |
US20070171848A1 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2007-07-26 | Sony Corporation | Communication system, communication device, notification method, recording medium, and program |
US20080025273A1 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2008-01-31 | Fujitsu Limited | Communication apparatus, network apparatus, communication system, communication method, communication program, and recording medium |
US20080046542A1 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2008-02-21 | Fujitsu Limited | Communication apparatus, relay apparatus, communication system, communication method, and communication program |
US20080069073A1 (en) * | 2006-09-14 | 2008-03-20 | Fujitsu Limited | Communication apparatus, network apparatus, communication system, communicating method, communicating program, and recording medium |
US20080212570A1 (en) * | 2007-01-12 | 2008-09-04 | Scanner Chen | System and method for selectively coupling various communication devices through common channel |
US20090306976A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US20090306970A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US20090304057A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US20090304058A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US20090306975A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US7751359B1 (en) * | 2003-11-26 | 2010-07-06 | Ericsson Ab | Call origination in a CDMA legacy MS domain using SIP |
US20100302962A1 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2010-12-02 | Fujitsu Limited | Wireless Terminal, Wireless Base Station, Wireless Communication Method, And Wireless Communication System |
US20110044335A1 (en) * | 2008-04-17 | 2011-02-24 | Pioneer Corporation | Information processor, receiver, transmitter, control device and control program |
US20110081897A1 (en) * | 2009-10-01 | 2011-04-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dynamic reconfiguration of cell site service(s) |
US20110142030A1 (en) * | 2009-06-16 | 2011-06-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for supporting higher-layer protocol messaging in an in-band modem |
US20110149847A1 (en) * | 2009-06-16 | 2011-06-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for supporting higher-layer protocol messaging in an in-band modem |
US20110206188A1 (en) * | 2010-02-23 | 2011-08-25 | Michael Feldman | Telecommunication system for improving quality of service |
US8199727B1 (en) | 2003-11-17 | 2012-06-12 | Ericsson Ab | Call delivery in a CDMA legacy MS domain for SIP call origination |
US20120230205A1 (en) * | 2011-03-11 | 2012-09-13 | Korea University Research And Business Foundation | Method and apparatus for collision avoidance in sensor network |
US8503517B2 (en) | 2008-06-05 | 2013-08-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US20160262189A1 (en) * | 2008-07-04 | 2016-09-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method for supporting an emergency call in a mobile communication system |
US10681753B2 (en) | 2014-02-19 | 2020-06-09 | Nec Corporation | Relaying user communication device enabling RRC, NAS connections, user communication device, base station, system, method, and non-transitory computer readable medium storing a program |
US20210173386A1 (en) * | 2019-05-20 | 2021-06-10 | Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc | Quick connection techniques for skid communicator tool |
Families Citing this family (122)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
FI109757B (en) * | 1997-06-23 | 2002-09-30 | Nokia Corp | Procedures, apparatus registers and systems for limiting the use of terminals |
US20080207197A1 (en) * | 1997-07-30 | 2008-08-28 | Steven Tischer | Apparatus, method, and computer-readable medium for interfacing devices with communications networks |
US7149514B1 (en) * | 1997-07-30 | 2006-12-12 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corp. | Cellular docking station |
JP3328179B2 (en) * | 1997-11-26 | 2002-09-24 | 日本電気株式会社 | Network traffic monitoring system |
US8165028B1 (en) * | 1997-12-10 | 2012-04-24 | Intel Corporation | Monitoring in communication system with wireless trunk |
US6208627B1 (en) * | 1997-12-10 | 2001-03-27 | Xircom, Inc. | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
DE19812916A1 (en) * | 1998-03-24 | 1999-10-14 | Siemens Ag | Method and radio communication system for connection control for calls from / to radio subscribers |
US6108314A (en) * | 1998-08-31 | 2000-08-22 | Motorola, Inc. | Method, subscriber device, wireless router, and communication system efficiently utilizing the receive/transmit switching time |
US6549534B1 (en) * | 1998-09-14 | 2003-04-15 | Siemens Information & Communication Networks, Inc. | Apparatus and method for accessing wireless trunks on a communications network |
US6611531B1 (en) | 1998-09-30 | 2003-08-26 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for routing integrated data, voice, and video traffic |
US7339924B1 (en) * | 1998-09-30 | 2008-03-04 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing ringing timeout disconnect supervision in remote telephone extensions using voice over packet-data-network systems (VOPS) |
US6763017B1 (en) | 1998-09-30 | 2004-07-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for voice port hunting of remote telephone extensions using voice over packet-data-network systems (VOPS) |
US6378069B1 (en) * | 1998-11-04 | 2002-04-23 | Nortel Networks Limited | Apparatus and methods for providing software updates to devices in a communication network |
US6266540B1 (en) * | 1998-11-30 | 2001-07-24 | Qualcomm Inc | Control interface protocol for telephone sets for a satellite telephone system |
US6842462B1 (en) * | 1998-12-18 | 2005-01-11 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Wireless access of packet based networks |
US6370127B1 (en) * | 1998-12-21 | 2002-04-09 | Nortel Networks Limited | Multilevel distributed frame selection and power control CDMA architecture method and apparatus for telecommunication networks |
US6452904B1 (en) * | 1999-01-15 | 2002-09-17 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Operation and maintenance flow support for A-interface connections |
US7068594B1 (en) | 1999-02-26 | 2006-06-27 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for fault tolerant permanent voice calls in voice-over-packet systems |
US6766162B1 (en) * | 1999-04-23 | 2004-07-20 | Skyworks Solutions, Inc. | Message notification system for wireless communication system |
KR100320910B1 (en) * | 1999-05-25 | 2002-02-04 | 서평원 | Call Processing Method Between Private Exchange Network And Mobile Communication Network Using Wireless Trunk Connection System |
US6792286B1 (en) * | 1999-06-28 | 2004-09-14 | Legerity, Inc. | Apparatus for transmitting and receiving signals |
US7409704B1 (en) * | 1999-07-15 | 2008-08-05 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | System and method for local policy enforcement for internet service providers |
US6614811B1 (en) * | 1999-10-05 | 2003-09-02 | Carrier Access Corporation | Modular multi-service telecommunication access device |
US6510315B1 (en) * | 1999-10-05 | 2003-01-21 | Intel Corporation | Systems and methods for maintaining the voice path connection during caller disconnect of an emergency 911 call |
GB0000927D0 (en) * | 2000-01-14 | 2000-03-08 | Nokia Networks Oy | Communication method and system |
JP2003520551A (en) * | 2000-01-24 | 2003-07-02 | レイディオスケープ リミテッド | Digital radio base station |
US7260078B1 (en) * | 2000-02-08 | 2007-08-21 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Method and system for providing management protocol mediation in wireless communications networks |
DE10009444A1 (en) * | 2000-02-29 | 2001-09-06 | Philips Corp Intellectual Pty | Operating method for a mobile phone |
FI20000675A (en) * | 2000-03-22 | 2001-09-23 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Improved method and apparatus for controlling cell exchange and a terminal of cellular communication system |
US20020010801A1 (en) * | 2000-04-21 | 2002-01-24 | Meagher Patrick S. | Server to third party serial gateway in a power control management system |
US6879582B1 (en) * | 2000-09-29 | 2005-04-12 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Media terminal adapter-cellular transceiver (MTA-CT) |
DE60144510D1 (en) * | 2000-12-27 | 2011-06-09 | Canon Kk | Wireless communication system with control of transmission timing |
WO2002063901A1 (en) * | 2001-02-06 | 2002-08-15 | Nokia Corporation | Access system for a cellular network |
DE60108225T2 (en) * | 2001-05-08 | 2005-12-08 | Agere Systems Guardian Corp., Orlando | Dynamic frequency selection in a wireless local area network with channel exchange between access points |
EP1261227A1 (en) * | 2001-05-21 | 2002-11-27 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for increased information transfer in a communication system |
CA2459117C (en) * | 2001-08-29 | 2008-03-11 | Research In Motion Limited | System and method for addressing a mobile device in an ip-based wireless network |
US7082306B2 (en) * | 2001-08-30 | 2006-07-25 | International Business Machines Corporation | Apparatus and method for merging wireless telephone service with existing wired telephone equipment in a facility |
US7603081B2 (en) * | 2001-09-14 | 2009-10-13 | Atc Technologies, Llc | Radiotelephones and operating methods that use a single radio frequency chain and a single baseband processor for space-based and terrestrial communications |
US7570764B2 (en) * | 2001-10-10 | 2009-08-04 | Nortel Networks Limited | Sequence number calculation and authentication in a communications system |
US20030114147A1 (en) * | 2001-12-13 | 2003-06-19 | Goss Stephen C. | Hold service on wireless calls |
US7120454B1 (en) | 2001-12-26 | 2006-10-10 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corp. | Auto sensing home base station for mobile telephone with remote answering capabilites |
US8121292B2 (en) * | 2002-02-26 | 2012-02-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for scrambling information bits on a channel in a communications system |
KR100415117B1 (en) * | 2002-03-04 | 2004-01-13 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for called compulsive on multi call into internet protocol phone in an internet protocol telephony system |
US8787988B2 (en) | 2003-01-29 | 2014-07-22 | Intellectual Ventures I Llc | Power management for wireless direct link |
USRE43127E1 (en) | 2002-06-12 | 2012-01-24 | Intellectual Ventures I Llc | Event-based multichannel direct link |
US8050360B2 (en) * | 2002-06-12 | 2011-11-01 | Intellectual Ventures I Llc | Direct link relay in a wireless network |
US7933293B2 (en) * | 2002-06-12 | 2011-04-26 | Xocyst Transfer Ag L.L.C. | Link margin notification using return frame |
US7948951B2 (en) | 2002-06-12 | 2011-05-24 | Xocyst Transfer Ag L.L.C. | Automatic peer discovery |
US7251235B2 (en) * | 2002-06-12 | 2007-07-31 | Conexant, Inc. | Event-based multichannel direct link |
US8037196B2 (en) * | 2002-06-26 | 2011-10-11 | Alcatel Lucent | Method for maintaining communication between communication devices having inconsistent protocols |
US7200424B2 (en) * | 2002-07-15 | 2007-04-03 | Bellsouth Intelectual Property Corporation | Systems and methods for restricting the use and movement of telephony devices |
US8380879B2 (en) | 2002-07-15 | 2013-02-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Interface devices for facilitating communications between devices and communications networks |
US8543098B2 (en) * | 2002-07-15 | 2013-09-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for securely providing communications between devices and networks |
US8526466B2 (en) * | 2002-07-15 | 2013-09-03 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for prioritizing communications between devices |
US8416804B2 (en) | 2002-07-15 | 2013-04-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for providing a user interface for facilitating communications between devices |
US8533070B2 (en) * | 2002-07-15 | 2013-09-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for aggregating and accessing data according to user information |
US8275371B2 (en) * | 2002-07-15 | 2012-09-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for providing communications and connection-oriented services to devices |
US8554187B2 (en) * | 2002-07-15 | 2013-10-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for routing communications between networks and devices |
US7385956B2 (en) | 2002-08-22 | 2008-06-10 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | LAN based wireless communications system |
AU2003285138A1 (en) | 2002-11-04 | 2004-06-07 | Vivato Inc | Directed wireless communication |
KR100448318B1 (en) * | 2002-11-08 | 2004-09-16 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for hand-off in a wileless network |
US7181196B2 (en) * | 2003-05-15 | 2007-02-20 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Performing authentication in a communications system |
US7187946B2 (en) * | 2003-10-02 | 2007-03-06 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Method and system for delivering wireless telephone service to customer premises via local loop telephone lines |
US20050130634A1 (en) * | 2003-10-31 | 2005-06-16 | Globespanvirata, Inc. | Location awareness in wireless networks |
US20050157674A1 (en) * | 2003-10-31 | 2005-07-21 | Globespanvirata Incorporated | Time-scheduled multichannel direct link |
US7502447B2 (en) * | 2003-11-25 | 2009-03-10 | Alcatel Lucent | Call failure recording |
US7146191B2 (en) * | 2004-01-16 | 2006-12-05 | United States Thermoelectric Consortium | Wireless communications apparatus and method |
JP4311234B2 (en) * | 2004-03-08 | 2009-08-12 | 沖電気工業株式会社 | Communication timing control device, communication timing control method, node, and communication system |
US20050277383A1 (en) * | 2004-06-10 | 2005-12-15 | Reid Jeffrey T | Trunking tone remote adapter and method for using the same |
US7246213B2 (en) * | 2004-07-28 | 2007-07-17 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Data address security device and method |
EP1806016B1 (en) | 2004-10-28 | 2009-08-12 | Telecom Italia S.p.A. | A method and a network architecture for configuring a radio terminal, radio terminal, network node and a computer program product therefor |
KR101111141B1 (en) | 2004-10-28 | 2012-03-08 | 텔레콤 이탈리아 소시에떼 퍼 아찌오니 | A method for configuring a radio terminal through a radio communication network, related network and computer program product therefor |
WO2006066396A1 (en) * | 2004-12-22 | 2006-06-29 | Dragonwave, Inc. | Wireless communication path management methods and systems |
US20060198326A1 (en) * | 2005-03-07 | 2006-09-07 | Yifan Yang | IP multicast streaming data error correction |
JP2006252462A (en) * | 2005-03-14 | 2006-09-21 | Ntt Docomo Inc | Electronic value exchanging method, user device, and third person device |
WO2006097837A1 (en) | 2005-03-17 | 2006-09-21 | Nortel Networks Limited | Circuit-switched and multimedia subsystem voice continuity |
US7792268B2 (en) * | 2005-03-30 | 2010-09-07 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Trunk architecture for coupling central offices associated with public switched telephone networks |
WO2006136896A1 (en) | 2005-06-21 | 2006-12-28 | Nortel Networks Limited | Bearer path optimization |
CN1885875A (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2006-12-27 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Telephone adapter |
US7506779B2 (en) * | 2005-07-01 | 2009-03-24 | Ball Corporation | Method and apparatus for forming a reinforcing bead in a container end closure |
US20070036325A1 (en) * | 2005-07-19 | 2007-02-15 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | SS7 network having wireline and failover wireless SS7 links |
US20070036326A1 (en) * | 2005-08-01 | 2007-02-15 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | SS7 network having wireline and failover Internet protocol (IP) SS7 links |
WO2007023358A2 (en) * | 2005-08-22 | 2007-03-01 | Nortel Networks Limited | Multimedia subsystem service control for circuit-switched subsystem calls |
CN1925667B (en) * | 2005-08-29 | 2011-04-20 | 国际商业机器公司 | Wireless planning method and equipment for ascertaining arrangement mode of base station in indoor environment |
KR20070041817A (en) * | 2005-10-17 | 2007-04-20 | 엘지노텔 주식회사 | Wll bsc enable to interface with 3g mobile communication network, method for call processing of 3g mobile communication network using it's |
US20070093249A1 (en) * | 2005-10-21 | 2007-04-26 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures L.P. | SS7 Link failover communications over existing cellular networks |
US7542951B1 (en) * | 2005-10-31 | 2009-06-02 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Strategies for providing diverse recommendations |
US8811954B1 (en) | 2005-10-31 | 2014-08-19 | Genband Us Llc | Network domain selection |
US7584159B1 (en) | 2005-10-31 | 2009-09-01 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Strategies for providing novel recommendations |
CN100413377C (en) * | 2005-11-17 | 2008-08-20 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method for realizing multiple telephone sets shared antenna cut-in terminal |
KR101275207B1 (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2013-06-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for allocating resource in mobile communication system |
US7715843B2 (en) * | 2006-04-20 | 2010-05-11 | At&T International Property I, L.P. | Electronic message exchange over multiple wireless communication networks with a single device |
US8331961B1 (en) | 2006-06-12 | 2012-12-11 | Apple, Inc. | Transfer of emergency services session between disparate subsystems |
US8180338B1 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2012-05-15 | Genband Us Llc | Selective call anchoring in a multimedia subsystem |
US20090280810A1 (en) * | 2006-06-14 | 2009-11-12 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method for transitioning support of communication sessions for a user element between different types of subsystems of different generations |
EP2033397A4 (en) * | 2006-06-14 | 2014-01-22 | Apple Inc | Inter-subsystem transfers |
US8170544B1 (en) * | 2006-07-25 | 2012-05-01 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Method and system for integrated management of base transceiver station (BTS) with wireless backhaul |
CN1929386B (en) * | 2006-09-18 | 2010-05-19 | 华为技术有限公司 | Charging method and system |
US8045568B2 (en) * | 2006-09-29 | 2011-10-25 | Genband Us Llc | Enterprise mobility |
WO2008041111A2 (en) * | 2006-10-04 | 2008-04-10 | Nortel Networks Limited | Circuit-switched and multimedia subsystem voice continuity |
CN201001113Y (en) * | 2006-12-21 | 2008-01-02 | 华为技术有限公司 | Connection component and RF device integrated using the same |
US8600006B2 (en) | 2006-12-27 | 2013-12-03 | Genband Us Llc | Voice continuity among user terminals |
US8792450B2 (en) * | 2007-05-10 | 2014-07-29 | Starhome Gmbh | System and method for providing local IP connectivity for a roaming mobile subscriber |
US8644298B1 (en) | 2007-09-12 | 2014-02-04 | Genband Us Llc | Adding a service control channel after session establishment |
US20090131017A1 (en) * | 2007-11-15 | 2009-05-21 | Airwalk Communications, Inc. | System, method, and computer-readable medium for access restriction of user equipment devices in an ip-femtocell system |
US8729732B2 (en) * | 2008-07-10 | 2014-05-20 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Cell site power generation |
WO2010066067A1 (en) * | 2008-12-12 | 2010-06-17 | 上海贝尔阿尔卡特股份有限公司 | Frame aggregating method in mobile communication system |
US20100202388A1 (en) * | 2009-02-03 | 2010-08-12 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Over-the-air enhancement for backhaul dynamic interference management in wireless networks |
US20100238990A1 (en) * | 2009-03-19 | 2010-09-23 | Rao Anil M | Methods for indentifying errant channel reporting devices |
US8412272B2 (en) | 2009-07-24 | 2013-04-02 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Rectifier circuit management system, such as for use in cell site power systems |
KR101278351B1 (en) * | 2009-12-15 | 2013-07-05 | 한국전자통신연구원 | System and method for providing on-demand seamless application service using dpi in communication networks |
US9504079B2 (en) * | 2010-02-22 | 2016-11-22 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | System and method for communications in communications systems with relay nodes |
US8310103B2 (en) | 2010-03-17 | 2012-11-13 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Cell site power system management, including battery circuit management |
US8340730B2 (en) * | 2010-05-11 | 2012-12-25 | George Allen Pallotta | System and method for safely blocking mobile communications usages |
US20120063355A1 (en) * | 2010-09-14 | 2012-03-15 | Research In Motion Limited | Apparatus, and associated method, for providing support-call data pursuant to a wireless device support call |
US8879732B2 (en) * | 2010-10-13 | 2014-11-04 | Nokia Corporation | Dynamic content-based ciphering on a control channel |
US20120100876A1 (en) * | 2010-10-20 | 2012-04-26 | Johnson Controls Technology Company | Hands free telephone system with integrated text messaging configuration |
DE112015006969T5 (en) * | 2015-09-25 | 2018-11-08 | Intel Corporation | Communication between integrated circuit assemblies using a millimeter-wave wireless fabric |
US11570609B2 (en) * | 2015-11-23 | 2023-01-31 | Tracfone Wireless, Inc. | Wireless replacement line also known as a wireless home phone configured for receiving wireless emergency alerts |
US10567943B2 (en) * | 2016-06-15 | 2020-02-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and systems for handover of an emergency call between different wireless networks |
US11672031B2 (en) * | 2020-06-03 | 2023-06-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Managing a backhaul configuration in a wireless multi-hop network |
US12050512B2 (en) * | 2022-08-02 | 2024-07-30 | Nxp B.V. | Dynamic configuration of reaction policies in virtualized fault management system |
Citations (74)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3711647A (en) * | 1969-12-23 | 1973-01-16 | Cit Alcatel | Circuit for interconnection of telephone and radio-telephone networks |
US3856982A (en) * | 1972-05-11 | 1974-12-24 | Int Standard Electric Corp | Telephone dialing arrangement |
US3912875A (en) * | 1972-04-03 | 1975-10-14 | Paul Katz | Radio-telephone communication system |
US3974343A (en) * | 1975-01-10 | 1976-08-10 | North Electric Company | Small modular communications switching system with distributed programmable control |
US4005269A (en) * | 1975-01-06 | 1977-01-25 | Harry H. Hicks, Jr. | Apparatus for interfacing between telephone and wireless communication systems |
US4012596A (en) * | 1975-08-06 | 1977-03-15 | Reach Electronics Inc. | Telephone patch |
US4028500A (en) * | 1973-05-15 | 1977-06-07 | Martin Marietta Corporation | Mobile unit supervisory control sequencer and method |
US4071711A (en) * | 1974-08-02 | 1978-01-31 | Farinon Electric Of Canada Ltd. | Telephone subscriber distribution system |
US4122304A (en) * | 1977-04-01 | 1978-10-24 | Motorola, Inc. | Control circuitry for a radio telephone |
US4176254A (en) * | 1977-12-27 | 1979-11-27 | Telcom, Inc. | Emergency roadside telephone system |
US4234764A (en) * | 1979-01-22 | 1980-11-18 | Ronald Beebe | Long distance telephone call security system |
US4369516A (en) * | 1980-09-15 | 1983-01-18 | Motorola, Inc. | Self-clocking data transmission system |
US4425480A (en) * | 1981-11-20 | 1984-01-10 | Communication Equipment And Engineering Co. | Telephone station apparatus with selective restricting of local calls |
US4555592A (en) * | 1983-05-23 | 1985-11-26 | Teleconferencing Systems International, Inc. | Wireless hands-free conference telephone system |
US4562307A (en) * | 1983-08-17 | 1985-12-31 | Thomson-Csf | Transmitter-receiver station having low power consumption for a two-way communication link |
US4567588A (en) * | 1984-03-23 | 1986-01-28 | Sangamo Weston, Inc. | Synchronization system for use in direct sequence spread spectrum signal receiver |
US4568800A (en) * | 1983-03-30 | 1986-02-04 | Nec Corporation | Multi-channel access (MCA) radio telephone system |
US4577182A (en) * | 1984-04-10 | 1986-03-18 | Peter Miller | Alarm system |
US4601047A (en) * | 1984-03-23 | 1986-07-15 | Sangamo Weston, Inc. | Code division multiplexer using direct sequence spread spectrum signal processing |
US4635285A (en) * | 1984-04-12 | 1987-01-06 | Motorola, Inc. | Communication system with voice priority for remote stations |
US4658304A (en) * | 1978-04-23 | 1987-04-14 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image recording system |
US4658096A (en) * | 1984-09-18 | 1987-04-14 | Metrofone, Inc. | System for interfacing a standard telephone set with a radio transceiver |
US4677656A (en) * | 1984-06-19 | 1987-06-30 | Motorola, Inc. | Telephone-radio interconnect system |
US4688210A (en) * | 1985-03-29 | 1987-08-18 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Method of and arrangement for synchronizing the receiver arrangements in a digital multiplex transmission system |
US4724538A (en) * | 1985-09-06 | 1988-02-09 | Comstock Group, Inc. | Emergency roadside telephone communications system |
US4724435A (en) * | 1985-11-06 | 1988-02-09 | Applied Spectrum Technologies, Inc. | Bi-directional data telemetry system |
US4737975A (en) * | 1984-09-18 | 1988-04-12 | Metrofone, Inc. | Programmable system for interfacing a standard telephone set with a radio transceiver |
US4765753A (en) * | 1986-03-08 | 1988-08-23 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Method and apparatus for handing-over a radio connection from one radio cell to another radio cell of a digital radio transmission system |
US4775997A (en) * | 1984-09-18 | 1988-10-04 | Metrofone, Inc. | System for interfacing a standard telephone set with a radio transceiver |
US4868519A (en) * | 1988-11-02 | 1989-09-19 | Dnic Brokerage Company | Microprocessor-controlled amplifier |
US4922517A (en) * | 1987-04-08 | 1990-05-01 | Metrofone, Inc. | System for interfacing a standard telephone set with a radio transceiver |
US4937852A (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1990-06-26 | Margaret Weiser | Corded to cordless telephone converter |
US4959851A (en) * | 1989-05-10 | 1990-09-25 | Motorola, Inc. | Dialing features for cellular telephone with standard telephone set |
US4975926A (en) * | 1989-03-30 | 1990-12-04 | Guenther Knapp | Wireless indoor data communication system |
US4984247A (en) * | 1988-09-29 | 1991-01-08 | Ascom Zelcom Ag | Digital radio transmission system for a cellular network, using the spread spectrum method |
US5046066A (en) * | 1987-02-09 | 1991-09-03 | Telesystems Slw Inc. | Wireless local area network |
US5099493A (en) * | 1990-08-27 | 1992-03-24 | Zeger-Abrams Incorporated | Multiple signal receiver for direct sequence, code division multiple access, spread spectrum signals |
US5117450A (en) * | 1989-05-10 | 1992-05-26 | Motorola, Inc. | Cellular telephone with standard telephone set |
US5134651A (en) * | 1991-04-18 | 1992-07-28 | Codecom Rural Communications, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing answer supervision and an autonomous pay telephone incorporating the same |
US5151920A (en) * | 1991-09-10 | 1992-09-29 | Ncr Corporation | Radio LAN station with improved frame delimiter detection in a spread spectrum environment |
US5200956A (en) * | 1989-05-26 | 1993-04-06 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Communications system for data transmission over a time division duplex frequency channel |
US5206881A (en) * | 1992-04-15 | 1993-04-27 | Telesystems Slw Inc. | Wireless local area network |
US5231646A (en) * | 1992-03-16 | 1993-07-27 | Kyros Corporation | Communications system |
US5243641A (en) * | 1990-08-01 | 1993-09-07 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Extended range cordless telephone system |
US5260967A (en) * | 1992-01-13 | 1993-11-09 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | CDMA/TDMA spread-spectrum communications system and method |
US5276703A (en) * | 1992-01-13 | 1994-01-04 | Windata, Inc. | Wireless local area network communications system |
US5278890A (en) * | 1991-11-27 | 1994-01-11 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Paging arrangements in a cellular mobile switching system |
US5285469A (en) * | 1991-06-03 | 1994-02-08 | Omnipoint Data Corporation | Spread spectrum wireless telephone system |
US5303287A (en) * | 1992-08-13 | 1994-04-12 | Hughes Aircraft Company | Integrated personal/cellular communications system architecture |
US5303286A (en) * | 1991-03-29 | 1994-04-12 | Space Systems/Loral, Inc. | Wireless telephone/satellite roaming system |
US5319634A (en) * | 1991-10-07 | 1994-06-07 | Phoenix Corporation | Multiple access telephone extension systems and methods |
US5337342A (en) * | 1991-09-14 | 1994-08-09 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Emergency call system |
US5343496A (en) * | 1993-09-24 | 1994-08-30 | Bell Communications Research, Inc. | Interference suppression in CDMA systems |
US5402413A (en) * | 1991-04-08 | 1995-03-28 | Omnipoint Corporation | Three-cell wireless communication system |
US5428821A (en) * | 1991-06-28 | 1995-06-27 | Motorola, Inc. | Base site with remote calibration capability |
US5455822A (en) * | 1990-10-23 | 1995-10-03 | Omnipoint Corporation | Method and apparatus for establishing spread spectrum communication |
US5467367A (en) * | 1991-06-07 | 1995-11-14 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Spread spectrum communication apparatus and telephone exchange system |
US5475735A (en) * | 1993-12-02 | 1995-12-12 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of providing wireless local loop operation with local mobility for a subscribed unit |
US5481533A (en) * | 1994-05-12 | 1996-01-02 | Bell Communications Research, Inc. | Hybrid intra-cell TDMA/inter-cell CDMA for wireless networks |
US5488631A (en) * | 1994-10-31 | 1996-01-30 | Radio Connect Corporation | Wireless direct-sequence spread spectrum TDMA communications system |
US5506837A (en) * | 1993-02-11 | 1996-04-09 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Cellular radio communication system which is selectively convertible into a trunked radio communication system for group calls |
US5535260A (en) * | 1994-02-24 | 1996-07-09 | Gte Mobile Communictions Services | Cellular radiotelephone with dialed number analysis |
US5537458A (en) * | 1992-08-17 | 1996-07-16 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Facsimile transmission in a digital cellular radio network |
US5548583A (en) * | 1992-11-24 | 1996-08-20 | Stanford Telecommuncations, Inc. | Wireless telephone user location capability for enhanced 911 application |
US5577029A (en) * | 1995-05-04 | 1996-11-19 | Interwave Communications | Cellular communication network having intelligent switching nodes |
US5596625A (en) * | 1994-09-28 | 1997-01-21 | U S West Technologies, Inc. | Method for routing emergency calls during busy interface channel conditions |
US5664004A (en) * | 1995-01-13 | 1997-09-02 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Support of multiplicity of radio interfaces over an interface between a base station system and a mobile switch |
US5671219A (en) * | 1993-11-01 | 1997-09-23 | Omnipoint Corporation | Communication protocol for spread spectrum communication |
US5724647A (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1998-03-03 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Wireless communication system |
US5787355A (en) * | 1994-04-22 | 1998-07-28 | Northern Telecom Limited | Method and apparatus for wireless trunking to private branch exchanges |
US5862481A (en) * | 1996-04-08 | 1999-01-19 | Northern Telecom Limited | Inter-technology roaming proxy |
US6175737B1 (en) * | 1996-11-15 | 2001-01-16 | David E. Lovejoy | Method and apparatus for wireless communications for base station controllers |
US6208627B1 (en) * | 1997-12-10 | 2001-03-27 | Xircom, Inc. | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
US6212395B1 (en) * | 1995-05-04 | 2001-04-03 | Interwave Communications International Ltd. | Cellular communication system |
Family Cites Families (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US515920A (en) * | 1894-03-06 | Money-changer for fare-boxes | ||
US4727435A (en) | 1984-09-21 | 1988-02-23 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image information processing system |
BR9509442A (en) * | 1994-10-27 | 1997-12-23 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | System and process for providing advanced voice services to subscribers of a telecommunications network |
FR2741226B1 (en) * | 1995-11-15 | 1997-12-05 | France Telecom | CELL TEST IN A CELL TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK |
US5884148A (en) * | 1996-07-08 | 1999-03-16 | Omnipoint Corporation | Wireless local loop system and method |
US5946619A (en) * | 1996-11-01 | 1999-08-31 | Ericsson Inc | System and method for improved paging and location updating of mobile subscribers |
US20010041553A1 (en) * | 1997-02-18 | 2001-11-15 | James Jen-Chei Chang | Systems and methods for providing intelligent wireless access systems |
US6385195B2 (en) * | 1997-07-21 | 2002-05-07 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Enhanced interworking function for interfacing digital cellular voice and fax protocols and internet protocols |
US6147988A (en) * | 1997-10-27 | 2000-11-14 | Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. | IP packet switching in a Telco switch |
-
1997
- 1997-12-10 US US08/988,546 patent/US6208627B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2001
- 2001-03-19 US US09/812,534 patent/US6751205B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2004
- 2004-03-18 US US10/803,374 patent/US7774278B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2004-03-18 US US10/803,386 patent/US20040174847A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (75)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3711647A (en) * | 1969-12-23 | 1973-01-16 | Cit Alcatel | Circuit for interconnection of telephone and radio-telephone networks |
US3912875A (en) * | 1972-04-03 | 1975-10-14 | Paul Katz | Radio-telephone communication system |
US3856982A (en) * | 1972-05-11 | 1974-12-24 | Int Standard Electric Corp | Telephone dialing arrangement |
US4028500A (en) * | 1973-05-15 | 1977-06-07 | Martin Marietta Corporation | Mobile unit supervisory control sequencer and method |
US4071711A (en) * | 1974-08-02 | 1978-01-31 | Farinon Electric Of Canada Ltd. | Telephone subscriber distribution system |
US4005269A (en) * | 1975-01-06 | 1977-01-25 | Harry H. Hicks, Jr. | Apparatus for interfacing between telephone and wireless communication systems |
US3974343A (en) * | 1975-01-10 | 1976-08-10 | North Electric Company | Small modular communications switching system with distributed programmable control |
US4012596A (en) * | 1975-08-06 | 1977-03-15 | Reach Electronics Inc. | Telephone patch |
US4122304A (en) * | 1977-04-01 | 1978-10-24 | Motorola, Inc. | Control circuitry for a radio telephone |
US4176254A (en) * | 1977-12-27 | 1979-11-27 | Telcom, Inc. | Emergency roadside telephone system |
US4658304A (en) * | 1978-04-23 | 1987-04-14 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image recording system |
US4234764A (en) * | 1979-01-22 | 1980-11-18 | Ronald Beebe | Long distance telephone call security system |
US4369516A (en) * | 1980-09-15 | 1983-01-18 | Motorola, Inc. | Self-clocking data transmission system |
US4425480A (en) * | 1981-11-20 | 1984-01-10 | Communication Equipment And Engineering Co. | Telephone station apparatus with selective restricting of local calls |
US4568800A (en) * | 1983-03-30 | 1986-02-04 | Nec Corporation | Multi-channel access (MCA) radio telephone system |
US4555592A (en) * | 1983-05-23 | 1985-11-26 | Teleconferencing Systems International, Inc. | Wireless hands-free conference telephone system |
US4562307A (en) * | 1983-08-17 | 1985-12-31 | Thomson-Csf | Transmitter-receiver station having low power consumption for a two-way communication link |
US4601047A (en) * | 1984-03-23 | 1986-07-15 | Sangamo Weston, Inc. | Code division multiplexer using direct sequence spread spectrum signal processing |
US4567588A (en) * | 1984-03-23 | 1986-01-28 | Sangamo Weston, Inc. | Synchronization system for use in direct sequence spread spectrum signal receiver |
US4577182A (en) * | 1984-04-10 | 1986-03-18 | Peter Miller | Alarm system |
US4635285A (en) * | 1984-04-12 | 1987-01-06 | Motorola, Inc. | Communication system with voice priority for remote stations |
US4677656A (en) * | 1984-06-19 | 1987-06-30 | Motorola, Inc. | Telephone-radio interconnect system |
US4737975A (en) * | 1984-09-18 | 1988-04-12 | Metrofone, Inc. | Programmable system for interfacing a standard telephone set with a radio transceiver |
US4658096A (en) * | 1984-09-18 | 1987-04-14 | Metrofone, Inc. | System for interfacing a standard telephone set with a radio transceiver |
US4775997A (en) * | 1984-09-18 | 1988-10-04 | Metrofone, Inc. | System for interfacing a standard telephone set with a radio transceiver |
US4688210A (en) * | 1985-03-29 | 1987-08-18 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Method of and arrangement for synchronizing the receiver arrangements in a digital multiplex transmission system |
US4724538A (en) * | 1985-09-06 | 1988-02-09 | Comstock Group, Inc. | Emergency roadside telephone communications system |
US4724435A (en) * | 1985-11-06 | 1988-02-09 | Applied Spectrum Technologies, Inc. | Bi-directional data telemetry system |
US4765753A (en) * | 1986-03-08 | 1988-08-23 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Method and apparatus for handing-over a radio connection from one radio cell to another radio cell of a digital radio transmission system |
US5046066A (en) * | 1987-02-09 | 1991-09-03 | Telesystems Slw Inc. | Wireless local area network |
US4922517A (en) * | 1987-04-08 | 1990-05-01 | Metrofone, Inc. | System for interfacing a standard telephone set with a radio transceiver |
US5724647A (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1998-03-03 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Wireless communication system |
US4937852A (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1990-06-26 | Margaret Weiser | Corded to cordless telephone converter |
US4984247A (en) * | 1988-09-29 | 1991-01-08 | Ascom Zelcom Ag | Digital radio transmission system for a cellular network, using the spread spectrum method |
US4868519A (en) * | 1988-11-02 | 1989-09-19 | Dnic Brokerage Company | Microprocessor-controlled amplifier |
US4975926A (en) * | 1989-03-30 | 1990-12-04 | Guenther Knapp | Wireless indoor data communication system |
US5117450A (en) * | 1989-05-10 | 1992-05-26 | Motorola, Inc. | Cellular telephone with standard telephone set |
US4959851A (en) * | 1989-05-10 | 1990-09-25 | Motorola, Inc. | Dialing features for cellular telephone with standard telephone set |
US5200956A (en) * | 1989-05-26 | 1993-04-06 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Communications system for data transmission over a time division duplex frequency channel |
US5243641A (en) * | 1990-08-01 | 1993-09-07 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Extended range cordless telephone system |
US5099493A (en) * | 1990-08-27 | 1992-03-24 | Zeger-Abrams Incorporated | Multiple signal receiver for direct sequence, code division multiple access, spread spectrum signals |
US5455822A (en) * | 1990-10-23 | 1995-10-03 | Omnipoint Corporation | Method and apparatus for establishing spread spectrum communication |
US5303286A (en) * | 1991-03-29 | 1994-04-12 | Space Systems/Loral, Inc. | Wireless telephone/satellite roaming system |
US5402413A (en) * | 1991-04-08 | 1995-03-28 | Omnipoint Corporation | Three-cell wireless communication system |
US5134651A (en) * | 1991-04-18 | 1992-07-28 | Codecom Rural Communications, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing answer supervision and an autonomous pay telephone incorporating the same |
US5361297A (en) * | 1991-04-18 | 1994-11-01 | Telular Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing answer supervision and an autonomous pay telephone incorporating the same |
US5285469A (en) * | 1991-06-03 | 1994-02-08 | Omnipoint Data Corporation | Spread spectrum wireless telephone system |
US5467367A (en) * | 1991-06-07 | 1995-11-14 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Spread spectrum communication apparatus and telephone exchange system |
US5428821A (en) * | 1991-06-28 | 1995-06-27 | Motorola, Inc. | Base site with remote calibration capability |
US5151920A (en) * | 1991-09-10 | 1992-09-29 | Ncr Corporation | Radio LAN station with improved frame delimiter detection in a spread spectrum environment |
US5337342A (en) * | 1991-09-14 | 1994-08-09 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Emergency call system |
US5319634A (en) * | 1991-10-07 | 1994-06-07 | Phoenix Corporation | Multiple access telephone extension systems and methods |
US5278890A (en) * | 1991-11-27 | 1994-01-11 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Paging arrangements in a cellular mobile switching system |
US5276703A (en) * | 1992-01-13 | 1994-01-04 | Windata, Inc. | Wireless local area network communications system |
US5260967A (en) * | 1992-01-13 | 1993-11-09 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | CDMA/TDMA spread-spectrum communications system and method |
US5231646A (en) * | 1992-03-16 | 1993-07-27 | Kyros Corporation | Communications system |
US5206881A (en) * | 1992-04-15 | 1993-04-27 | Telesystems Slw Inc. | Wireless local area network |
US5303287A (en) * | 1992-08-13 | 1994-04-12 | Hughes Aircraft Company | Integrated personal/cellular communications system architecture |
US5537458A (en) * | 1992-08-17 | 1996-07-16 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Facsimile transmission in a digital cellular radio network |
US5548583A (en) * | 1992-11-24 | 1996-08-20 | Stanford Telecommuncations, Inc. | Wireless telephone user location capability for enhanced 911 application |
US5506837A (en) * | 1993-02-11 | 1996-04-09 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Cellular radio communication system which is selectively convertible into a trunked radio communication system for group calls |
US5343496A (en) * | 1993-09-24 | 1994-08-30 | Bell Communications Research, Inc. | Interference suppression in CDMA systems |
US5671219A (en) * | 1993-11-01 | 1997-09-23 | Omnipoint Corporation | Communication protocol for spread spectrum communication |
US5475735A (en) * | 1993-12-02 | 1995-12-12 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of providing wireless local loop operation with local mobility for a subscribed unit |
US5535260A (en) * | 1994-02-24 | 1996-07-09 | Gte Mobile Communictions Services | Cellular radiotelephone with dialed number analysis |
US5787355A (en) * | 1994-04-22 | 1998-07-28 | Northern Telecom Limited | Method and apparatus for wireless trunking to private branch exchanges |
US5481533A (en) * | 1994-05-12 | 1996-01-02 | Bell Communications Research, Inc. | Hybrid intra-cell TDMA/inter-cell CDMA for wireless networks |
US5596625A (en) * | 1994-09-28 | 1997-01-21 | U S West Technologies, Inc. | Method for routing emergency calls during busy interface channel conditions |
US5488631A (en) * | 1994-10-31 | 1996-01-30 | Radio Connect Corporation | Wireless direct-sequence spread spectrum TDMA communications system |
US5664004A (en) * | 1995-01-13 | 1997-09-02 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Support of multiplicity of radio interfaces over an interface between a base station system and a mobile switch |
US5577029A (en) * | 1995-05-04 | 1996-11-19 | Interwave Communications | Cellular communication network having intelligent switching nodes |
US6212395B1 (en) * | 1995-05-04 | 2001-04-03 | Interwave Communications International Ltd. | Cellular communication system |
US5862481A (en) * | 1996-04-08 | 1999-01-19 | Northern Telecom Limited | Inter-technology roaming proxy |
US6175737B1 (en) * | 1996-11-15 | 2001-01-16 | David E. Lovejoy | Method and apparatus for wireless communications for base station controllers |
US6208627B1 (en) * | 1997-12-10 | 2001-03-27 | Xircom, Inc. | Signaling and protocol for communication system with wireless trunk |
Cited By (41)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7061924B1 (en) * | 2001-05-24 | 2006-06-13 | Intel Corporation | Methods and apparatus for remote metering |
US8199727B1 (en) | 2003-11-17 | 2012-06-12 | Ericsson Ab | Call delivery in a CDMA legacy MS domain for SIP call origination |
US7751359B1 (en) * | 2003-11-26 | 2010-07-06 | Ericsson Ab | Call origination in a CDMA legacy MS domain using SIP |
US20070171848A1 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2007-07-26 | Sony Corporation | Communication system, communication device, notification method, recording medium, and program |
US7872995B2 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2011-01-18 | Sony Corporation | Communication system, communication device, notification method, recording medium, and program |
US20080025273A1 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2008-01-31 | Fujitsu Limited | Communication apparatus, network apparatus, communication system, communication method, communication program, and recording medium |
US20080046542A1 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2008-02-21 | Fujitsu Limited | Communication apparatus, relay apparatus, communication system, communication method, and communication program |
US8781481B2 (en) | 2006-07-31 | 2014-07-15 | Fujitsu Limited | Communication apparatus, network apparatus, communication system, communication method, and recording medium |
US20080069073A1 (en) * | 2006-09-14 | 2008-03-20 | Fujitsu Limited | Communication apparatus, network apparatus, communication system, communicating method, communicating program, and recording medium |
US20080212570A1 (en) * | 2007-01-12 | 2008-09-04 | Scanner Chen | System and method for selectively coupling various communication devices through common channel |
US20110044335A1 (en) * | 2008-04-17 | 2011-02-24 | Pioneer Corporation | Information processor, receiver, transmitter, control device and control program |
US20090306975A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US8503517B2 (en) | 2008-06-05 | 2013-08-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US20090304058A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US20090304057A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US8964788B2 (en) | 2008-06-05 | 2015-02-24 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
CN102057604A (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2011-05-11 | 高通股份有限公司 | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US8958441B2 (en) | 2008-06-05 | 2015-02-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US8825480B2 (en) | 2008-06-05 | 2014-09-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and method of obtaining non-speech data embedded in vocoder packet |
US20090306976A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US20090306970A1 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2009-12-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US8725502B2 (en) | 2008-06-05 | 2014-05-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US9083521B2 (en) | 2008-06-05 | 2015-07-14 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of an in-band modem for data communications over digital wireless communication networks |
US9730251B2 (en) * | 2008-07-04 | 2017-08-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method for supporting an emergency call in a mobile communication system |
EP3370393A1 (en) * | 2008-07-04 | 2018-09-05 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method for supporting an emergency call in a mobile communication system |
US20160262189A1 (en) * | 2008-07-04 | 2016-09-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method for supporting an emergency call in a mobile communication system |
US20100302962A1 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2010-12-02 | Fujitsu Limited | Wireless Terminal, Wireless Base Station, Wireless Communication Method, And Wireless Communication System |
US8743864B2 (en) | 2009-06-16 | 2014-06-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for supporting higher-layer protocol messaging in an in-band modem |
US20110149847A1 (en) * | 2009-06-16 | 2011-06-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for supporting higher-layer protocol messaging in an in-band modem |
US8855100B2 (en) | 2009-06-16 | 2014-10-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for supporting higher-layer protocol messaging in an in-band modem |
US20110142030A1 (en) * | 2009-06-16 | 2011-06-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for supporting higher-layer protocol messaging in an in-band modem |
US8526362B2 (en) * | 2009-10-01 | 2013-09-03 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dynamic reconfiguration of cell site service(s) |
US8824375B2 (en) | 2009-10-01 | 2014-09-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dynamic reconfiguration of cell site service(s) |
US20110081897A1 (en) * | 2009-10-01 | 2011-04-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dynamic reconfiguration of cell site service(s) |
US20110206188A1 (en) * | 2010-02-23 | 2011-08-25 | Michael Feldman | Telecommunication system for improving quality of service |
US8483364B2 (en) * | 2010-02-23 | 2013-07-09 | Michael Feldman | Telecommunication system for improving quality of service |
US9008111B2 (en) * | 2011-03-11 | 2015-04-14 | Korea University Research And Business Foundation | Method and apparatus for collision avoidance in sensor network |
US20120230205A1 (en) * | 2011-03-11 | 2012-09-13 | Korea University Research And Business Foundation | Method and apparatus for collision avoidance in sensor network |
US10681753B2 (en) | 2014-02-19 | 2020-06-09 | Nec Corporation | Relaying user communication device enabling RRC, NAS connections, user communication device, base station, system, method, and non-transitory computer readable medium storing a program |
US20210173386A1 (en) * | 2019-05-20 | 2021-06-10 | Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc | Quick connection techniques for skid communicator tool |
US11656610B2 (en) * | 2019-05-20 | 2023-05-23 | Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc | Quick connection techniques for skid communicator tool |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20040176129A1 (en) | 2004-09-09 |
US6751205B2 (en) | 2004-06-15 |
US20010036167A1 (en) | 2001-11-01 |
US7774278B2 (en) | 2010-08-10 |
US6208627B1 (en) | 2001-03-27 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US7774278B2 (en) | Wireless access unit with trunk interface | |
EP1040691B1 (en) | Communication system and method for addressing multiple capacity wireless trunk | |
US6526026B1 (en) | Digit transmission over wireless communication link | |
US7322041B2 (en) | Authentication and security in wireless communication system | |
US6097817A (en) | Encryption and decryption in communication system with wireless trunk | |
US6496694B1 (en) | Wireless local loop with intelligent base station | |
US5475735A (en) | Method of providing wireless local loop operation with local mobility for a subscribed unit | |
US8165028B1 (en) | Monitoring in communication system with wireless trunk | |
FI103169B (en) | Method of establishing a telecommunications connection | |
FI105310B (en) | A method for establishing a call in a wireless access network |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |